]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blob - gcc/tm.texi
configure.in (i?86-*-beos{pe,elf,}*): Recognize.
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / tm.texi
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988,89,92-99,2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h}. This header file defines numerous macros
15 that convey the information about the target machine that does not fit
16 into the scheme of the @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be
17 a link to @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h}
18 includes @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include
19 @file{config.h}.
20
21 @menu
22 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
23 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}.
24 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
25 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
26 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
27 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
28 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
29 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
30 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
31 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
32 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
33 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
34 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
35 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
36 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
37 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
38 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
39 * Cross-compilation:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
40 * Misc:: Everything else.
41 @end menu
42
43 @node Driver
44 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
45 @cindex driver
46 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
47
48 @c prevent bad page break with this line
49 You can control the compilation driver.
50
51 @table @code
52 @findex SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
53 @item SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{char})
54 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
55 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
56 option takes--zero, for many options.
57
58 By default, this macro is defined as
59 @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
60 properly. You need not define @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
61 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
62 should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
63 additional options.
64
65 @findex WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
66 @item WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{name})
67 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{name}}
68 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
69 option takes--zero, for many options. This macro rather than
70 @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} is used for multi-character option names.
71
72 By default, this macro is defined as
73 @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
74 properly. You need not define @code{WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
75 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
76 should call @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
77 additional options.
78
79 @findex SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION
80 @item SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION (@var{char})
81 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
82 stops compilation before the generation of an executable. The value is
83 boolean, non-zero if the option does stop an executable from being
84 generated, zero otherwise.
85
86 By default, this macro is defined as
87 @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION}, which handles the standard
88 options properly. You need not define
89 @code{SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} unless you wish to add additional
90 options which affect the generation of an executable. Any redefinition
91 should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} and then check
92 for additional options.
93
94 @findex SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
95 @item SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
96 A string-valued C expression which enumerates the options for which
97 the linker needs a space between the option and its argument.
98
99 If this macro is not defined, the default value is @code{""}.
100
101 @findex CPP_SPEC
102 @item CPP_SPEC
103 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
104 pass to CPP. It can also specify how to translate options you
105 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP.
106
107 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
108
109 @findex NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
110 @item NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
111 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
112 @code{__SIZE_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__SIZE_TYPE__} must then be defined
113 by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
114
115 This should be defined if @code{SIZE_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
116 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
117 be defined.
118
119 @findex NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
120 @item NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
121 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
122 @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__} must then be
123 defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
124
125 This should be defined if @code{PTRDIFF_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
126 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
127 be defined.
128
129 @findex SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
130 @item SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
131 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
132 pass to CPP. By default, this macro is defined to pass the option
133 @samp{-D__CHAR_UNSIGNED__} to CPP if @code{char} will be treated as
134 @code{unsigned char} by @code{cc1}.
135
136 Do not define this macro unless you need to override the default
137 definition.
138
139 @findex CC1_SPEC
140 @item CC1_SPEC
141 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
142 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
143 front ends.
144 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
145 for GCC to pass to front ends..
146
147 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
148
149 @findex CC1PLUS_SPEC
150 @item CC1PLUS_SPEC
151 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
152 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
153 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
154
155 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
156 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
157 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
158 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC.
159
160 @findex ASM_SPEC
161 @item ASM_SPEC
162 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
163 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
164 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
165 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
166
167 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
168
169 @findex ASM_FINAL_SPEC
170 @item ASM_FINAL_SPEC
171 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
172 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
173 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
174 an example of this.
175
176 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
177
178 @findex LINK_SPEC
179 @item LINK_SPEC
180 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
181 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
182 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
183
184 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
185
186 @findex LIB_SPEC
187 @item LIB_SPEC
188 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
189 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
190 command given to the linker.
191
192 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
193 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
194
195 @findex LIBGCC_SPEC
196 @item LIBGCC_SPEC
197 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
198 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
199 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
200 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
201
202 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
203 passes the string @samp{-lgcc} to the linker unless the @samp{-shared}
204 option is specified.
205
206 @findex STARTFILE_SPEC
207 @item STARTFILE_SPEC
208 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
209 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
210 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
211
212 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
213 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
214
215 @findex ENDFILE_SPEC
216 @item ENDFILE_SPEC
217 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
218 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
219 the very end of the command given to the linker.
220
221 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
222
223 @findex EXTRA_SPECS
224 @item EXTRA_SPECS
225 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
226 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
227 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
228
229 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
230 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
231 string constant that provides the specification.
232
233 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
234
235 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
236 related targets, which have various @code{..._SPECS} which are similar
237 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
238 these definitions.
239
240 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
241 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
242 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
243 used.
244
245 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
246
247 @example
248 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
249 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
250
251 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
252 @end example
253
254 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
255 @smallexample
256 #undef CPP_SPEC
257 #define CPP_SPEC \
258 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
259 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} %@{mcall-aix: -D_CALL_AIX @} \
260 %@{!mcall-sysv: %@{!mcall-aix: %(cpp_sysv_default) @}@} \
261 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
262
263 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
264 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
265 @end smallexample
266
267 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
268 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
269
270 @smallexample
271 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
272 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
273 @end smallexample
274
275 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
276 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
277 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
278 @file{libgcc.a} itself and should not pass @samp{-L} options to the
279 linker. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
280 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search and will
281 pass @samp{-L} options to it.
282
283 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
284 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
285 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
286 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
287 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
288 This macro is similar to @code{LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL}, except that it does
289 not affect @samp{-L} options.
290
291 @findex LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
292 @item LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
293 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
294 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
295 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
296 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
297 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
298 the effect you need.
299
300 @findex MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
301 @item MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
302 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
303 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
304 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
305 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
306
307 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
308 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
309 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
310 @xref{Target Fragment}.
311
312 @findex RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
313 @item RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
314 Define this macro to tell @code{gcc} that it should only translate
315 a @samp{-B} prefix into a @samp{-L} linker option if the prefix
316 indicates an absolute file name.
317
318 @findex STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
319 @item STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
320 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
321 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/gcc-lib/} as the default prefix to
322 try when searching for the executable files of the compiler.
323
324 @findex MD_EXEC_PREFIX
325 @item MD_EXEC_PREFIX
326 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
327 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
328 when the @samp{-b} option is used, or the compiler is built as a cross
329 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
330 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.in}.
331
332 @findex STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
333 @item STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
334 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
335 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/} as the default prefix to
336 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
337
338 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
339 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
340 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
341 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
342 @samp{-b} option is used, or when the compiler is built as a cross
343 compiler.
344
345 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
346 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
347 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
348 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the @samp{-b} option is
349 used, or when the compiler is built as a cross compiler.
350
351 @findex INIT_ENVIRONMENT
352 @item INIT_ENVIRONMENT
353 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
354 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
355 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
356 initialize the necessary environment variables.
357
358 @findex LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
359 @item LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
360 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
361 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
362 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
363 comes before @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
364
365 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
366 @file{/usr/local/include} or its replacement.
367
368 @findex SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
369 @item SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
370 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to specify a
371 system-specific directory to search for header files before the standard
372 directory. @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} comes before
373 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
374
375 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search the directory
376 specified.
377
378 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
379 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
380 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
381 standard choice of @file{/usr/include} as the default prefix to
382 try when searching for header files.
383
384 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
385 @file{/usr/include} or its replacement.
386
387 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
388 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
389 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}.
390 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
391 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
392
393 @findex INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
394 @item INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
395 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
396 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
397 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
398 @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
399 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
400 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
401 and specify private search areas for GCC. The directory
402 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
403
404 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
405 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
406 string constant), the component name, and flag for C++-only directories,
407 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
408 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
409 the array with a null element.
410
411 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
412 if any, in all upper-case letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
413 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of the a vendor-supplied
414 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
415
416
417 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
418
419 @example
420 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
421 @{ \
422 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
423 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
424 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
425 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
426 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
427 @}
428 @end example
429 @end table
430
431 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
432
433 @enumerate
434 @item
435 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
436
437 @item
438 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
439
440 @item
441 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
442
443 @item
444 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
445
446 @item
447 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
448
449 @item
450 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
451 @end enumerate
452
453 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
454
455 @enumerate
456 @item
457 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
458
459 @item
460 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
461
462 @item
463 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
464 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
465
466 @item
467 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
468
469 @item
470 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
471
472 @item
473 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
474
475 @item
476 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if any.
477
478 @item
479 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}.
480
481 @item
482 @file{/lib/}.
483
484 @item
485 @file{/usr/lib/}.
486 @end enumerate
487
488 @node Run-time Target
489 @section Run-time Target Specification
490 @cindex run-time target specification
491 @cindex predefined macros
492 @cindex target specifications
493
494 @c prevent bad page break with this line
495 Here are run-time target specifications.
496
497 @table @code
498 @findex CPP_PREDEFINES
499 @item CPP_PREDEFINES
500 Define this to be a string constant containing @samp{-D} options to
501 define the predefined macros that identify this machine and system.
502 These macros will be predefined unless the @samp{-ansi} option is
503 specified.
504
505 In addition, a parallel set of macros are predefined, whose names are
506 made by appending @samp{__} at the beginning and at the end. These
507 @samp{__} macros are permitted by the ANSI standard, so they are
508 predefined regardless of whether @samp{-ansi} is specified.
509
510 For example, on the Sun, one can use the following value:
511
512 @smallexample
513 "-Dmc68000 -Dsun -Dunix"
514 @end smallexample
515
516 The result is to define the macros @code{__mc68000__}, @code{__sun__}
517 and @code{__unix__} unconditionally, and the macros @code{mc68000},
518 @code{sun} and @code{unix} provided @samp{-ansi} is not specified.
519
520 @findex extern int target_flags
521 @item extern int target_flags;
522 This declaration should be present.
523
524 @cindex optional hardware or system features
525 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
526 @item TARGET_@dots{}
527 This series of macros is to allow compiler command arguments to
528 enable or disable the use of optional features of the target machine.
529 For example, one machine description serves both the 68000 and
530 the 68020; a command argument tells the compiler whether it should
531 use 68020-only instructions or not. This command argument works
532 by means of a macro @code{TARGET_68020} that tests a bit in
533 @code{target_flags}.
534
535 Define a macro @code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} for each such option.
536 Its definition should test a bit in @code{target_flags}; for example:
537
538 @smallexample
539 #define TARGET_68020 (target_flags & 1)
540 @end smallexample
541
542 One place where these macros are used is in the condition-expressions
543 of instruction patterns. Note how @code{TARGET_68020} appears
544 frequently in the 68000 machine description file, @file{m68k.md}.
545 Another place they are used is in the definitions of the other
546 macros in the @file{@var{machine}.h} file.
547
548 @findex TARGET_SWITCHES
549 @item TARGET_SWITCHES
550 This macro defines names of command options to set and clear
551 bits in @code{target_flags}. Its definition is an initializer
552 with a subgrouping for each command option.
553
554 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the option
555 name, a number, which contains the bits to set in
556 @code{target_flags}, and a second string which is the description
557 displayed by --help. If the number is negative then the bits specified
558 by the number are cleared instead of being set. If the description
559 string is present but empty, then no help information will be displayed
560 for that option, but it will not count as an undocumented option. The
561 actual option name is made by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
562
563 One of the subgroupings should have a null string. The number in
564 this grouping is the default value for @code{target_flags}. Any
565 target options act starting with that value.
566
567 Here is an example which defines @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}
568 with opposite meanings, and picks the latter as the default:
569
570 @smallexample
571 #define TARGET_SWITCHES \
572 @{ @{ "68020", 1, "" @}, \
573 @{ "68000", -1, "Compile for the 68000" @}, \
574 @{ "", 1, "" @}@}
575 @end smallexample
576
577 @findex TARGET_OPTIONS
578 @item TARGET_OPTIONS
579 This macro is similar to @code{TARGET_SWITCHES} but defines names of command
580 options that have values. Its definition is an initializer with a
581 subgrouping for each command option.
582
583 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the fixed part
584 of the option name, the address of a variable, and a description string.
585 The variable, type @code{char *}, is set to the variable part of the
586 given option if the fixed part matches. The actual option name is made
587 by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
588
589 Here is an example which defines @samp{-mshort-data-@var{number}}. If the
590 given option is @samp{-mshort-data-512}, the variable @code{m88k_short_data}
591 will be set to the string @code{"512"}.
592
593 @smallexample
594 extern char *m88k_short_data;
595 #define TARGET_OPTIONS \
596 @{ @{ "short-data-", &m88k_short_data, "Specify the size of the short data section" @} @}
597 @end smallexample
598
599 @findex TARGET_VERSION
600 @item TARGET_VERSION
601 This macro is a C statement to print on @code{stderr} a string
602 describing the particular machine description choice. Every machine
603 description should define @code{TARGET_VERSION}. For example:
604
605 @smallexample
606 #ifdef MOTOROLA
607 #define TARGET_VERSION \
608 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, Motorola syntax)");
609 #else
610 #define TARGET_VERSION \
611 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, MIT syntax)");
612 #endif
613 @end smallexample
614
615 @findex OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
616 @item OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
617 Sometimes certain combinations of command options do not make sense on
618 a particular target machine. You can define a macro
619 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS} to take account of this. This macro, if
620 defined, is executed once just after all the command options have been
621 parsed.
622
623 Don't use this macro to turn on various extra optimizations for
624 @samp{-O}. That is what @code{OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS} is for.
625
626 @findex OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS
627 @item OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS (@var{level}, @var{size})
628 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
629 various optimization levels. This macro, if defined, is executed once
630 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
631 of the command options have been parsed. Values set in this macro are
632 used as the default values for the other command line options.
633
634 @var{level} is the optimization level specified; 2 if @samp{-O2} is
635 specified, 1 if @samp{-O} is specified, and 0 if neither is specified.
636
637 @var{size} is non-zero if @samp{-Os} is specified and zero otherwise.
638
639 You should not use this macro to change options that are not
640 machine-specific. These should uniformly selected by the same
641 optimization level on all supported machines. Use this macro to enable
642 machine-specific optimizations.
643
644 @strong{Do not examine @code{write_symbols} in
645 this macro!} The debugging options are not supposed to alter the
646 generated code.
647
648 @findex CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
649 @item CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
650 Define this macro if debugging can be performed even without a frame
651 pointer. If this macro is defined, GCC will turn on the
652 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} option whenever @samp{-O} is specified.
653 @end table
654
655 @node Storage Layout
656 @section Storage Layout
657 @cindex storage layout
658
659 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
660 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
661 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
662 @xref{Run-time Target}.
663
664 @table @code
665 @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
666 @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
667 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
668 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
669 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
670 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
671 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
672 macro need not be a constant.
673
674 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
675 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
676
677 @findex BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
678 @item BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
679 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
680 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
681
682 @findex WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
683 @item WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
684 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
685 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
686 memory locations and registers; GCC fundamentally assumes that the
687 order of words in memory is the same as the order in registers. This
688 macro need not be a constant.
689
690 @findex LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
691 @item LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
692 Define this macro if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN is not constant. This must be a
693 constant value with the same meaning as WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN, which will be
694 used only when compiling libgcc2.c. Typically the value will be set
695 based on preprocessor defines.
696
697 @findex FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
698 @item FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
699 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
700 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
701 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
702 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
703
704 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
705 multi-word integers.
706
707 @findex BITS_PER_UNIT
708 @item BITS_PER_UNIT
709 Define this macro to be the number of bits in an addressable storage
710 unit (byte); normally 8.
711
712 @findex BITS_PER_WORD
713 @item BITS_PER_WORD
714 Number of bits in a word; normally 32.
715
716 @findex MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
717 @item MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
718 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
719 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
720 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
721
722 @findex UNITS_PER_WORD
723 @item UNITS_PER_WORD
724 Number of storage units in a word; normally 4.
725
726 @findex MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
727 @item MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
728 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
729 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
730 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
731
732 @findex POINTER_SIZE
733 @item POINTER_SIZE
734 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
735 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
736 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}.
737
738 @findex POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
739 @item POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
740 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pointers that need to be
741 extended from being @code{POINTER_SIZE} bits wide to @code{Pmode} are to
742 be zero-extended and zero if they are to be sign-extended.
743
744 You need not define this macro if the @code{POINTER_SIZE} is equal
745 to the width of @code{Pmode}.
746
747 @findex PROMOTE_MODE
748 @item PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
749 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
750 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
751 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
752 scalar type.
753
754 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
755 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
756 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
757 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
758 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
759 counterparts.
760
761 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
762 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
763 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
764 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
765 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
766 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
767
768 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
769
770 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
771 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
772 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
773 should also be done for outgoing function arguments.
774
775 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
776 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
777 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
778 should also be done for the return value of functions.
779
780 If this macro is defined, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} must perform the same
781 promotions done by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}.
782
783 @findex PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
784 @item PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
785 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
786 should @emph{only} be performed for outgoing function arguments or
787 function return values, as specified by @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS}
788 and @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN}, respectively.
789
790 @findex PARM_BOUNDARY
791 @item PARM_BOUNDARY
792 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
793 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
794 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
795 size of an integer.
796
797 @findex STACK_BOUNDARY
798 @item STACK_BOUNDARY
799 Define this macro if there is a guaranteed alignment for the stack
800 pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression
801 for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a
802 default if PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY is not defined.
803
804 @findex PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
805 @item PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
806 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for
807 the stack pointer. The definition is a C expression
808 for the desired alignment (measured in bits). If STACK_BOUNDARY is
809 also defined, this macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger
810 than STACK_BOUNDARY.
811
812 @cindex @code{PUSH_ROUNDING}, interaction with @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}
813 If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is not defined, the stack will always be aligned
814 to the specified boundary. If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined and specifies
815 a less strict alignment than @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, the stack may
816 be momentarily unaligned while pushing arguments.
817
818 @findex FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
819 @item FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
820 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
821
822 @findex BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
823 @item BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
824 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in bits.
825
826 @findex MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
827 @item MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
828 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
829 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
830 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
831 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
832
833 @findex BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
834 @item BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
835 Biggest alignment that any structure field can require on this machine,
836 in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
837 structure fields only.
838
839 @findex ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN
840 @item ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
841 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
842 alignment computed in the usual way is @var{computed}. GCC uses
843 this value instead of the value in @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} or
844 @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT}, if defined, for structure fields only.
845
846 @findex MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
847 @item MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
848 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
849 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
850 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
851 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
852
853 @findex DATA_ALIGNMENT
854 @item DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
855 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
856 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
857 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
858 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
859
860 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
861
862 @findex strcpy
863 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
864 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
865 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
866 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
867
868 @findex CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
869 @item CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
870 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
871 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
872 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
873 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
874 align the object.
875
876 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
877
878 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
879 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
880 constants can be done inline.
881
882 @findex LOCAL_ALIGNMENT
883 @item LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
884 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
885 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
886 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
887 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
888
889 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
890
891 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
892 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
893
894 @findex EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
895 @item EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
896 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit field that follows an
897 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
898
899 Note that @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} also affects the alignment
900 that results from an empty field.
901
902 @findex STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
903 @item STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
904 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
905 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
906
907 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
908 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
909
910 @findex STRICT_ALIGNMENT
911 @item STRICT_ALIGNMENT
912 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
913 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
914 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
915
916 @findex PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
917 @item PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
918 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
919 alignment of bitfields and the structures that contain them.
920
921 The behavior is that the type written for a bitfield (@code{int},
922 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the
923 entire structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary
924 field of that type. In addition, the bitfield is placed within the
925 structure so that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a
926 boundary for it.
927
928 Thus, on most machines, a bitfield whose type is written as @code{int}
929 would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force four-byte
930 alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may not be four
931 bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
932
933 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
934 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
935
936 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
937 bitfields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
938 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
939 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
940
941 The other known way of making bitfields work is to define
942 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
943 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
944
945 Unless the machine has bitfield instructions or you define
946 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
947 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
948
949 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
950 bitfields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
951 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
952
953 @example
954 struct foo1
955 @{
956 char x;
957 char :0;
958 char y;
959 @};
960
961 struct foo2
962 @{
963 char x;
964 int :0;
965 char y;
966 @};
967
968 main ()
969 @{
970 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
971 sizeof (struct foo1));
972 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
973 sizeof (struct foo2));
974 exit (0);
975 @}
976 @end example
977
978 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
979 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
980
981 @findex BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
982 @item BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
983 Like PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS except that its effect is limited to
984 aligning a bitfield within the structure.
985
986 @findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE
987 @item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
988 Define this macro as an expression for the overall size of a type
989 (given by @var{type} as a tree node) when the size computed in the
990 usual way is @var{computed} and the alignment is @var{specified}.
991
992 The default is to round @var{computed} up to a multiple of @var{specified}.
993
994 @findex ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN
995 @item ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
996 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
997 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
998 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
999 @var{specified}.
1000
1001 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1002 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1003
1004 @findex MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1005 @item MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1006 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1007 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1008 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1009 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1010 (DImode)} is assumed.
1011
1012 @findex STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE
1013 @item STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1014 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1015 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1016 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1017 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1018 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1019 having its mode specified.
1020
1021 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1022 would most commonly define this macro if the
1023 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1024 64-bit mode.
1025
1026 @findex STACK_SIZE_MODE
1027 @item STACK_SIZE_MODE
1028 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1029 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1030 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1031
1032 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1033 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1034 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1035
1036 @findex CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE
1037 @item CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE (@var{mode}, @var{value}, @var{overflow})
1038 A C statement to validate the value @var{value} (of type
1039 @code{double}) for mode @var{mode}. This means that you check whether
1040 @var{value} fits within the possible range of values for mode
1041 @var{mode} on this target machine. The mode @var{mode} is always
1042 a mode of class @code{MODE_FLOAT}. @var{overflow} is nonzero if
1043 the value is already known to be out of range.
1044
1045 If @var{value} is not valid or if @var{overflow} is nonzero, you should
1046 set @var{overflow} to 1 and then assign some valid value to @var{value}.
1047 Allowing an invalid value to go through the compiler can produce
1048 incorrect assembler code which may even cause Unix assemblers to crash.
1049
1050 This macro need not be defined if there is no work for it to do.
1051
1052 @findex TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1053 @item TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1054 A code distinguishing the floating point format of the target machine.
1055 There are three defined values:
1056
1057 @table @code
1058 @findex IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1059 @item IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1060 This code indicates IEEE floating point. It is the default; there is no
1061 need to define this macro when the format is IEEE.
1062
1063 @findex VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1064 @item VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1065 This code indicates the peculiar format used on the Vax.
1066
1067 @findex UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1068 @item UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1069 This code indicates any other format.
1070 @end table
1071
1072 The value of this macro is compared with @code{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT}
1073 (@pxref{Config}) to determine whether the target machine has the same
1074 format as the host machine. If any other formats are actually in use on
1075 supported machines, new codes should be defined for them.
1076
1077 The ordering of the component words of floating point values stored in
1078 memory is controlled by @code{FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the target
1079 machine and @code{HOST_FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the host.
1080
1081 @findex DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1082 @item DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1083 GCC supports two ways of implementing C++ vtables: traditional or with
1084 so-called ``thunks''. The flag @samp{-fvtable-thunk} chooses between them.
1085 Define this macro to be a C expression for the default value of that flag.
1086 If @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} is 0, GCC uses the traditional
1087 implementation by default. The ``thunk'' implementation is more efficient
1088 (especially if you have provided an implementation of
1089 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK}, see @ref{Function Entry}), but is not binary
1090 compatible with code compiled using the traditional implementation.
1091 If you are writing a new ports, define @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} to 1.
1092
1093 If you do not define this macro, the default for @samp{-fvtable-thunk} is 0.
1094 @end table
1095
1096 @node Type Layout
1097 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1098
1099 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1100 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1101 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1102 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1103
1104 @table @code
1105 @findex INT_TYPE_SIZE
1106 @item INT_TYPE_SIZE
1107 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1108 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1109
1110 @findex MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1111 @item MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1112 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the target
1113 machine. If this is undefined, the default is @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE}.
1114 Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the largest value that
1115 @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is used in @code{cpp}.
1116
1117 @findex SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1118 @item SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1119 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1120 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1121 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1122 unit.)
1123
1124 @findex LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1125 @item LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1126 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1127 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1128
1129 @findex MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1130 @item MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1131 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1132 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1133 @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1134 largest value that @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1135 used in @code{cpp}.
1136
1137 @findex LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1138 @item LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1139 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1140 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1141 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of
1142 macro must be at least 64.
1143
1144 @findex CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1145 @item CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1146 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1147 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one quarter
1148 of a word. (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up
1149 to one unit.)
1150
1151 @findex MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1152 @item MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1153 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1154 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1155 @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1156 largest value that @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1157 used in @code{cpp}.
1158
1159 @findex FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1160 @item FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1161 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1162 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1163
1164 @findex DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1165 @item DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1166 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1167 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1168 words.
1169
1170 @findex LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1171 @item LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1172 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1173 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1174 words.
1175
1176 @findex WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1177 @item WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1178 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1179 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1180 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1181 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1182 is the default.
1183
1184 @findex DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1185 @item DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1186 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1187 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1188 always override this default with the options @samp{-fsigned-char}
1189 and @samp{-funsigned-char}.
1190
1191 @findex DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1192 @item DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1193 A C expression to determine whether to give an @code{enum} type
1194 only as many bytes as it takes to represent the range of possible values
1195 of that type. A nonzero value means to do that; a zero value means all
1196 @code{enum} types should be allocated like @code{int}.
1197
1198 If you don't define the macro, the default is 0.
1199
1200 @findex SIZE_TYPE
1201 @item SIZE_TYPE
1202 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1203 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1204 contents of the string.
1205
1206 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1207 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1208 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1209 of the data type names defined in the function
1210 @code{init_decl_processing} in the file @file{c-decl.c}. You may not
1211 omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the compiler to
1212 crash on startup.
1213
1214 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1215 int"}.
1216
1217 @findex PTRDIFF_TYPE
1218 @item PTRDIFF_TYPE
1219 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1220 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1221 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1222 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1223
1224 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1225
1226 @findex WCHAR_TYPE
1227 @item WCHAR_TYPE
1228 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1229 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1230 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1231 information.
1232
1233 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1234
1235 @findex WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1236 @item WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1237 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1238 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1239 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1240
1241 @findex MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1242 @item MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1243 Maximum number for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1244 characters. If this is undefined, the default is
1245 @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1246 largest value that @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1247 used in @code{cpp}.
1248
1249 @findex OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1250 @item OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1251 Define this macro if the type of Objective C selectors should be
1252 @code{int}.
1253
1254 If this macro is not defined, then selectors should have the type
1255 @code{struct objc_selector *}.
1256
1257 @findex OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1258 @item OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1259 Define this macro if the compiler can group all the selectors together
1260 into a vector and use just one label at the beginning of the vector.
1261 Otherwise, the compiler must give each selector its own assembler
1262 label.
1263
1264 On certain machines, it is important to have a separate label for each
1265 selector because this enables the linker to eliminate duplicate selectors.
1266
1267 @findex TARGET_BELL
1268 @item TARGET_BELL
1269 A C constant expression for the integer value for escape sequence
1270 @samp{\a}.
1271
1272 @findex TARGET_TAB
1273 @findex TARGET_BS
1274 @findex TARGET_NEWLINE
1275 @item TARGET_BS
1276 @itemx TARGET_TAB
1277 @itemx TARGET_NEWLINE
1278 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1279 @samp{\b}, @samp{\t} and @samp{\n}.
1280
1281 @findex TARGET_VT
1282 @findex TARGET_FF
1283 @findex TARGET_CR
1284 @item TARGET_VT
1285 @itemx TARGET_FF
1286 @itemx TARGET_CR
1287 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1288 @samp{\v}, @samp{\f} and @samp{\r}.
1289 @end table
1290
1291 @node Registers
1292 @section Register Usage
1293 @cindex register usage
1294
1295 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1296 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1297
1298 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1299 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1300 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1301 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1302 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1303
1304 @menu
1305 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1306 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1307 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1308 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1309 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1310 @end menu
1311
1312 @node Register Basics
1313 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1314
1315 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1316 Registers have various characteristics.
1317
1318 @table @code
1319 @findex FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1320 @item FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1321 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1322 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1323 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1324 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1325
1326 @item FIXED_REGISTERS
1327 @findex FIXED_REGISTERS
1328 @cindex fixed register
1329 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1330 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1331 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1332 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1333 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1334 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1335 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1336
1337 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1338 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1339 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1340
1341 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1342 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1343 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1344 the user with the command options @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1345 @samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1346
1347 @findex CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1348 @item CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1349 @cindex call-used register
1350 @cindex call-clobbered register
1351 @cindex call-saved register
1352 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1353 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1354 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1355 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1356 function calls.
1357
1358 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1359 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1360 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1361
1362 @findex HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED
1363 @item HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1364 @cindex call-used register
1365 @cindex call-clobbered register
1366 @cindex call-saved register
1367 A C expression that is non-zero if it is not permissible to store a
1368 value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1369 call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1370 macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1371 preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1372
1373 @findex CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1374 @findex fixed_regs
1375 @findex call_used_regs
1376 @item CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1377 Zero or more C statements that may conditionally modify four variables
1378 @code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs}, @code{global_regs}
1379 (these three are of type @code{char []}) and @code{reg_class_contents}
1380 (of type @code{HARD_REG_SET}).
1381 Before the macro is called @code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs}
1382 and @code{reg_class_contents} have been initialized from
1383 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} and
1384 @code{REG_CLASS_CONTENTS}, respectively,
1385 @code{global_regs} has been cleared, and any @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1386 @samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}} command
1387 options have been applied.
1388
1389 This is necessary in case the fixed or call-clobbered registers depend
1390 on target flags.
1391
1392 You need not define this macro if it has no work to do.
1393
1394 @cindex disabling certain registers
1395 @cindex controlling register usage
1396 If the usage of an entire class of registers depends on the target
1397 flags, you may indicate this to GCC by using this macro to modify
1398 @code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} to 1 for each of the
1399 registers in the classes which should not be used by GCC. Also define
1400 the macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} to return @code{NO_REGS} if it
1401 is called with a letter for a class that shouldn't be used.
1402
1403 (However, if this class is not included in @code{GENERAL_REGS} and all
1404 of the insn patterns whose constraints permit this class are
1405 controlled by target switches, then GCC will automatically avoid using
1406 these registers when the target switches are opposed to them.)
1407
1408 @findex NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1409 @item NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1410 If this macro is defined and has a nonzero value, it means that
1411 @code{setjmp} and related functions fail to save the registers, or that
1412 @code{longjmp} fails to restore them. To compensate, the compiler
1413 avoids putting variables in registers in functions that use
1414 @code{setjmp}.
1415
1416 @findex INCOMING_REGNO
1417 @item INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1418 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1419 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1420 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1421 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1422 outbound register.
1423
1424 @findex OUTGOING_REGNO
1425 @item OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1426 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1427 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1428 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1429 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1430 register.
1431
1432 @ignore
1433 @findex PC_REGNUM
1434 @item PC_REGNUM
1435 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1436 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1437 @end ignore
1438 @end table
1439
1440 @node Allocation Order
1441 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1442 @cindex order of register allocation
1443 @cindex register allocation order
1444
1445 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1446 Registers are allocated in order.
1447
1448 @table @code
1449 @findex REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1450 @item REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1451 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1452 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1453 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1454
1455 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1456 (all else being equal).
1457
1458 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1459 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1460 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1461 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1462 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1463
1464 @findex ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1465 @item ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1466 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1467 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1468
1469 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1470 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1471 register; and so on.
1472
1473 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1474 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1475
1476 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1477 @end table
1478
1479 @node Values in Registers
1480 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1481
1482 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1483 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1484 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1485
1486 @table @code
1487 @findex HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1488 @item HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1489 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1490 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1491 @var{mode}.
1492
1493 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1494 definition of this macro is
1495
1496 @smallexample
1497 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1498 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1499 / UNITS_PER_WORD))
1500 @end smallexample
1501
1502 @findex ALTER_HARD_SUBREG
1503 @item ALTER_HARD_SUBREG (@var{tgt_mode}, @var{word}, @var{src_mode}, @var{regno})
1504 A C expression that returns an adjusted hard register number for
1505
1506 @smallexample
1507 (subreg:@var{tgt_mode} (reg:@var{src_mode} @var{regno}) @var{word})
1508 @end smallexample
1509
1510 This may be needed if the target machine has mixed sized big-endian
1511 registers, like Sparc v9.
1512
1513 @findex HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1514 @item HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1515 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1516 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1517 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1518 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1519
1520 @smallexample
1521 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1522 @end smallexample
1523
1524 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1525 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1526
1527 @cindex register pairs
1528 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1529 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1530 odd register numbers for such modes.
1531
1532 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1533 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1534 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1535 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1536
1537 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1538 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1539 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1540 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1541 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1542 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1543 to be tieable.
1544
1545 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1546 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1547 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1548 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1549 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1550 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1551
1552 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1553 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1554 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1555 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1556 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1557 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1558 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1559 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1560 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1561
1562 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1563 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1564 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1565 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1566 constraints for those instructions.
1567
1568 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1569 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1570 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1571 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1572 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1573
1574 @findex MODES_TIEABLE_P
1575 @item MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1576 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1577 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1578
1579 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1580 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1581 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1582 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1583 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1584 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1585
1586 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1587 possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
1588 allocation.
1589
1590 @findex AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1591 @item AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1592 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1593 registers. You should only define this macro if support fo copying to/from
1594 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1595 @end table
1596
1597 @node Leaf Functions
1598 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1599
1600 @cindex leaf functions
1601 @cindex functions, leaf
1602 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1603 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1604 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1605 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1606 normally arrive.
1607
1608 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1609 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1610 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1611 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1612 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1613 functions''.
1614
1615 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1616 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1617 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1618 accomplish this.
1619
1620 @table @code
1621 @findex LEAF_REGISTERS
1622 @item LEAF_REGISTERS
1623 A C initializer for a vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1624 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1625 function treatment.
1626
1627 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1628 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1629 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1630 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1631 in this vector.
1632
1633 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1634 the treatment of leaf functions.
1635
1636 @findex LEAF_REG_REMAP
1637 @item LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1638 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1639 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1640
1641 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1642 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield -1, which
1643 will cause the compiler to abort.
1644
1645 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1646 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1647 this.
1648 @end table
1649
1650 @findex current_function_is_leaf
1651 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
1652 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
1653 treat leaf functions specially. They can test the C variable
1654 @code{current_function_is_leaf} which is nonzero for leaf functions.
1655 @code{current_function_is_leaf} is set prior to local register allocation
1656 and is valid for the remaining compiler passes. They can also test the C
1657 variable @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for
1658 leaf functions which only use leaf registers.
1659 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after reload and is
1660 only useful if @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
1661 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1662 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1663
1664 @node Stack Registers
1665 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1666
1667 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1668 ``registers'' form a stack, as in the 80387 coprocessor for the 80386.
1669 Stack registers are normally written by pushing onto the stack, and are
1670 numbered relative to the top of the stack.
1671
1672 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1673 they must be consecutively numbered.
1674
1675 @table @code
1676 @findex STACK_REGS
1677 @item STACK_REGS
1678 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1679
1680 @findex FIRST_STACK_REG
1681 @item FIRST_STACK_REG
1682 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1683 of the stack.
1684
1685 @findex LAST_STACK_REG
1686 @item LAST_STACK_REG
1687 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1688 the stack.
1689 @end table
1690
1691 @node Register Classes
1692 @section Register Classes
1693 @cindex register class definitions
1694 @cindex class definitions, register
1695
1696 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1697 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1698 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1699 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1700
1701 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1702 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1703 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1704
1705 @findex ALL_REGS
1706 @findex NO_REGS
1707 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1708 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1709 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1710 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1711
1712 @findex GENERAL_REGS
1713 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1714 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1715 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1716 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1717 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
1718
1719 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
1720 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
1721
1722 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
1723 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
1724 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
1725 them in operand constraints.
1726
1727 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
1728 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
1729 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
1730 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
1731 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code.
1732
1733 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
1734 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
1735 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
1736 in their union.
1737
1738 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
1739 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
1740 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
1741 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
1742 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
1743
1744 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
1745 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
1746 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
1747 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
1748 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
1749 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
1750 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
1751 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
1752 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
1753
1754 @table @code
1755 @findex enum reg_class
1756 @item enum reg_class
1757 An enumeral type that must be defined with all the register class names
1758 as enumeral values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
1759 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumeral value,
1760 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
1761 tells how many classes there are.
1762
1763 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
1764 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
1765 in many of the tables described below.
1766
1767 @findex N_REG_CLASSES
1768 @item N_REG_CLASSES
1769 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
1770
1771 @example
1772 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
1773 @end example
1774
1775 @findex REG_CLASS_NAMES
1776 @item REG_CLASS_NAMES
1777 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
1778 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
1779
1780 @findex REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1781 @item REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1782 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
1783 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
1784 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
1785 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
1786
1787 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
1788 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
1789 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
1790 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
1791
1792 @findex REGNO_REG_CLASS
1793 @item REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
1794 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
1795 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
1796 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
1797 register.
1798
1799 @findex BASE_REG_CLASS
1800 @item BASE_REG_CLASS
1801 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1802 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
1803 which is the register value plus a displacement.
1804
1805 @findex INDEX_REG_CLASS
1806 @item INDEX_REG_CLASS
1807 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1808 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
1809 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
1810 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
1811
1812 @findex REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER
1813 @item REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER (@var{char})
1814 A C expression which defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
1815 letters for register classes. If @var{char} is such a letter, the
1816 value should be the register class corresponding to it. Otherwise,
1817 the value should be @code{NO_REGS}. The register letter @samp{r},
1818 corresponding to class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, will not be passed
1819 to this macro; you do not need to handle it.
1820
1821 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1822 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
1823 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1824 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses. It may be
1825 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1826 allocated such a hard register.
1827
1828 @findex REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1829 @item REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
1830 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
1831 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
1832 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
1833 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
1834 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
1835 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
1836
1837 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
1838 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
1839 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1840 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
1841 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1842 allocated such a hard register.
1843
1844 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
1845 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
1846 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
1847 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
1848 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
1849 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
1850 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
1851 only if neither labeling works.
1852
1853 @findex PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
1854 @item PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1855 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1856 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
1857 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
1858 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
1859 safe:
1860
1861 @example
1862 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
1863 @end example
1864
1865 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
1866 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
1867 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
1868 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
1869 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
1870
1871 If @var{x} is a @code{const_double}, by returning @code{NO_REGS}
1872 you can force @var{x} into a memory constant. This is useful on
1873 certain machines where immediate floating values cannot be loaded into
1874 certain kinds of registers.
1875
1876 @findex PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1877 @item PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1878 Like @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, but for output reloads instead of
1879 input reloads. If you don't define this macro, the default is to use
1880 @var{class}, unchanged.
1881
1882 @findex LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS
1883 @item LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
1884 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1885 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
1886 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
1887 ordinarily be used.
1888
1889 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
1890 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
1891
1892 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
1893 smaller class.
1894
1895 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
1896 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
1897
1898 @findex SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS
1899 @findex SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1900 @findex SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1901 @item SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1902 @itemx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1903 @itemx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1904 Many machines have some registers that cannot be copied directly to or
1905 from memory or even from other types of registers. An example is the
1906 @samp{MQ} register, which on most machines, can only be copied to or
1907 from general registers, but not memory. Some machines allow copying all
1908 registers to and from memory, but require a scratch register for stores
1909 to some memory locations (e.g., those with symbolic address on the RT,
1910 and those with certain symbolic address on the Sparc when compiling
1911 PIC). In some cases, both an intermediate and a scratch register are
1912 required.
1913
1914 You should define these macros to indicate to the reload phase that it may
1915 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
1916 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
1917 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
1918 you should define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
1919 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
1920 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
1921
1922 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
1923 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
1924 should be defined to return the largest register class required. If the
1925 requirements for input and output reloads are the same, the macro
1926 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should be used instead of defining both
1927 macros identically.
1928
1929 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
1930 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
1931 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
1932 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
1933 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
1934
1935 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
1936 intermediate register), you should define patterns for
1937 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
1938 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which will normally be
1939 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
1940 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
1941 register.
1942
1943 Define constraints for the reload register and scratch register that
1944 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
1945 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
1946 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
1947 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
1948 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
1949
1950 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
1951 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
1952 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return -1 if the pseudo is
1953 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
1954
1955 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
1956 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
1957 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
1958 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
1959 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as a
1960 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
1961 general registers.
1962
1963 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1964 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
1965 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
1966 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
1967 those machines to be a C expression that is non-zero if objects of mode
1968 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
1969 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
1970 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
1971
1972 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
1973
1974 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX
1975 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
1976 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
1977 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
1978 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
1979 defined by this macro.
1980
1981 Do not define this macro if you do not define
1982 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
1983
1984 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
1985 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
1986 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
1987 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
1988 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
1989 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
1990 same as that of @var{mode}.
1991
1992 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
1993 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
1994 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
1995 registers.
1996
1997 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
1998 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
1999 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2000 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2001 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2002 details.
2003
2004 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2005 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2006 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2007
2008 @findex SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2009 @item SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2010 On some machines, it is risky to let hard registers live across arbitrary
2011 insns. Typically, these machines have instructions that require values
2012 to be in specific registers (like an accumulator), and reload will fail
2013 if the required hard register is used for another purpose across such an
2014 insn.
2015
2016 Define @code{SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES} to be an expression with a non-zero
2017 value on these machines. When this macro has a non-zero value, the
2018 compiler will try to minimize the lifetime of hard registers.
2019
2020 It is always safe to define this macro with a non-zero value, but if you
2021 unnecessarily define it, you will reduce the amount of optimizations
2022 that can be performed in some cases. If you do not define this macro
2023 with a non-zero value when it is required, the compiler will run out of
2024 spill registers and print a fatal error message. For most machines, you
2025 should not define this macro at all.
2026
2027 @findex CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2028 @item CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P (@var{class})
2029 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pseudos that have been assigned
2030 to registers of class @var{class} would likely be spilled because
2031 registers of @var{class} are needed for spill registers.
2032
2033 The default value of this macro returns 1 if @var{class} has exactly one
2034 register and zero otherwise. On most machines, this default should be
2035 used. Only define this macro to some other expression if pseudos
2036 allocated by @file{local-alloc.c} end up in memory because their hard
2037 registers were needed for spill registers. If this macro returns nonzero
2038 for those classes, those pseudos will only be allocated by
2039 @file{global.c}, which knows how to reallocate the pseudo to another
2040 register. If there would not be another register available for
2041 reallocation, you should not change the definition of this macro since
2042 the only effect of such a definition would be to slow down register
2043 allocation.
2044
2045 @findex CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2046 @item CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2047 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2048 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2049
2050 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2051 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2052 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2053 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2054
2055 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2056 in the reload pass.
2057
2058 @item CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_SIZE
2059 If defined, a C expression for a class that contains registers which the
2060 compiler must always access in a mode that is the same size as the mode
2061 in which it loaded the register.
2062
2063 For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2064 floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64-bits.
2065 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2066 does not store the low-order 32-bits, as would be the case for a normal
2067 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines this macro as
2068 @code{FLOAT_REGS}.
2069 @end table
2070
2071 Three other special macros describe which operands fit which constraint
2072 letters.
2073
2074 @table @code
2075 @findex CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2076 @item CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2077 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2078 letters (@samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}) that specify
2079 particular ranges of integer values. If @var{c} is one of those
2080 letters, the expression should check that @var{value}, an integer, is in
2081 the appropriate range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is
2082 not one of those letters, the value should be 0 regardless of
2083 @var{value}.
2084
2085 @findex CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2086 @item CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2087 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2088 letters that specify particular ranges of @code{const_double} values
2089 (@samp{G} or @samp{H}).
2090
2091 If @var{c} is one of those letters, the expression should check that
2092 @var{value}, an RTX of code @code{const_double}, is in the appropriate
2093 range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is not one of those
2094 letters, the value should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2095
2096 @code{const_double} is used for all floating-point constants and for
2097 @code{DImode} fixed-point constants. A given letter can accept either
2098 or both kinds of values. It can use @code{GET_MODE} to distinguish
2099 between these kinds.
2100
2101 @findex EXTRA_CONSTRAINT
2102 @item EXTRA_CONSTRAINT (@var{value}, @var{c})
2103 A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
2104 letters (@samp{Q}, @samp{R}, @samp{S}, @samp{T}, @samp{U}) that can
2105 be used to segregate specific types of operands, usually memory
2106 references, for the target machine. Normally this macro will not be
2107 defined. If it is required for a particular target machine, it should
2108 return 1 if @var{value} corresponds to the operand type represented by
2109 the constraint letter @var{c}. If @var{c} is not defined as an extra
2110 constraint, the value returned should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2111
2112 For example, on the ROMP, load instructions cannot have their output in r0 if
2113 the memory reference contains a symbolic address. Constraint letter
2114 @samp{Q} is defined as representing a memory address that does
2115 @emph{not} contain a symbolic address. An alternative is specified with
2116 a @samp{Q} constraint on the input and @samp{r} on the output. The next
2117 alternative specifies @samp{m} on the input and a register class that
2118 does not include r0 on the output.
2119 @end table
2120
2121 @node Stack and Calling
2122 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2123 @cindex calling conventions
2124
2125 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2126 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2127
2128 @menu
2129 * Frame Layout::
2130 * Stack Checking::
2131 * Frame Registers::
2132 * Elimination::
2133 * Stack Arguments::
2134 * Register Arguments::
2135 * Scalar Return::
2136 * Aggregate Return::
2137 * Caller Saves::
2138 * Function Entry::
2139 * Profiling::
2140 @end menu
2141
2142 @node Frame Layout
2143 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2144 @cindex stack frame layout
2145 @cindex frame layout
2146
2147 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2148 Here is the basic stack layout.
2149
2150 @table @code
2151 @findex STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2152 @item STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2153 Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2154 pointer to a smaller address.
2155
2156 When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{},'' it means that the
2157 compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
2158 definition used does not matter.
2159
2160 @findex FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2161 @item FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2162 Define this macro if the addresses of local variable slots are at negative
2163 offsets from the frame pointer.
2164
2165 @findex ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2166 @item ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2167 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2168 addresses on the stack.
2169
2170 @findex STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2171 @item STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2172 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2173
2174 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2175 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2176 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2177 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2178 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2179 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2180
2181 @findex STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2182 @item STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2183 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2184 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2185 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2186
2187 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2188 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2189
2190 @findex FIRST_PARM_OFFSET
2191 @item FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2192 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2193 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2194 function.
2195
2196 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2197 the first argument's address.
2198
2199 @findex STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET
2200 @item STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2201 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2202 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2203
2204 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2205 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2206 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2207
2208 @findex DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS
2209 @item DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2210 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2211 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2212 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2213 itself.
2214
2215 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2216 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2217 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2218
2219 @findex SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2220 @item SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2221 If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2222 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2223 on the Sparc, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2224 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2225 define this macro.
2226
2227 @findex BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2228 @item BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2229 If defined, a C expression that contains an rtx that is used to store
2230 the address of the current frame into the built in @code{setjmp} buffer.
2231 The default value, @code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx}, is correct for most
2232 machines. One reason you may need to define this macro is if
2233 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} is the appropriate value on your machine.
2234
2235 @findex RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2236 @item RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2237 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2238 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2239 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2240 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2241 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
2242
2243 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2244 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is not way to
2245 determine the return address of other frames.
2246
2247 @findex RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2248 @item RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2249 Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
2250 from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
2251
2252 @findex INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2253 @item INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2254 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2255 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2256 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2257 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2258 the stack.
2259
2260 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2261 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2262
2263 @findex INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2264 @item INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2265 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2266 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2267 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2268 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2269 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2270
2271 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2272 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2273
2274 @findex ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET
2275 @item ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET
2276 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2277 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2278 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2279 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2280 during virtual register instantiation.
2281
2282 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2283 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2284
2285 @findex SMALL_STACK
2286 @item SMALL_STACK
2287 Define this macro if the stack size for the target is very small. This
2288 has the effect of disabling gcc's builtin @samp{alloca}, though
2289 @samp{__builtin_alloca} is not affected.
2290 @end table
2291
2292 @node Stack Checking
2293 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2294
2295 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of
2296 the stack, if the @samp{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of three ways:
2297
2298 @enumerate
2299 @item
2300 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2301 will assume that you have arranged for stack checking to be done at
2302 appropriate places in the configuration files, e.g., in
2303 @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}. GCC will do not other special processing.
2304
2305 @item
2306 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and you defined a named pattern
2307 called @code{check_stack} in your @file{md} file, GCC will call that
2308 pattern with one argument which is the address to compare the stack
2309 value against. You must arrange for this pattern to report an error if
2310 the stack pointer is out of range.
2311
2312 @item
2313 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2314 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2315 @end enumerate
2316
2317 Normally, you will use the default values of these macros, so GCC
2318 will use the third approach.
2319
2320 @table @code
2321 @findex STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2322 @item STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2323 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2324 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2325 is require by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to have to stack
2326 checking in some more efficient way than GCC's portable approach.
2327 The default value of this macro is zero.
2328
2329 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2330 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2331 An integer representing the interval at which GCC must generate stack
2332 probe instructions. You will normally define this macro to be no larger
2333 than the size of the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The
2334 default value of 4096 is suitable for most systems.
2335
2336 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2337 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2338 A integer which is nonzero if GCC should perform the stack probe
2339 as a load instruction and zero if GCC should use a store instruction.
2340 The default is zero, which is the most efficient choice on most systems.
2341
2342 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2343 @item STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2344 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow,
2345 for languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of
2346 75 words should be adequate for most machines.
2347
2348 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2349 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2350 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2351 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2352 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2353 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2354 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2355 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2356
2357 @findex STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2358 @item STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2359 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2360 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2361 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2362 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2363 use the default of four words.
2364
2365 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2366 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2367 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2368 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2369 @samp{-fstack-check}.
2370 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2371 normally not need to override that default.
2372 @end table
2373
2374 @need 2000
2375 @node Frame Registers
2376 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2377
2378 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2379 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2380
2381 @table @code
2382 @findex STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2383 @item STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2384 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2385 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2386 the hardware determines which register this is.
2387
2388 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2389 @item FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2390 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2391 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2392 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2393 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2394
2395 @findex HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2396 @item HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2397 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2398 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2399 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2400 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2401 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2402 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2403 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2404 used for the frame pointer.
2405
2406 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2407 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2408 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2409 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2410 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2411 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2412 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2413
2414 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2415 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2416
2417 @findex ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2418 @item ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2419 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2420 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2421 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2422 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2423 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2424 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2425 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2426 (@pxref{Elimination}).
2427
2428 @findex RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2429 @item RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2430 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2431 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2432 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2433 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2434 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2435 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2436
2437 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2438 address from the stack.
2439
2440 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2441 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2442 @item STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2443 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2444 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2445 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2446 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2447 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2448 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2449 not be defined.@refill
2450
2451 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2452
2453 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2454 defined; instead, the next two macros should be defined.
2455
2456 @findex STATIC_CHAIN
2457 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2458 @item STATIC_CHAIN
2459 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2460 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros provide rtx giving
2461 @code{mem} expressions that denote where they are stored.
2462 @code{STATIC_CHAIN} and @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING} give the locations
2463 as seen by the calling and called functions, respectively. Often the former
2464 will be at an offset from the stack pointer and the latter at an offset from
2465 the frame pointer.@refill
2466
2467 @findex stack_pointer_rtx
2468 @findex frame_pointer_rtx
2469 @findex arg_pointer_rtx
2470 The variables @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, @code{frame_pointer_rtx}, and
2471 @code{arg_pointer_rtx} will have been initialized prior to the use of these
2472 macros and should be used to refer to those items.
2473
2474 If the static chain is passed in a register, the two previous macros should
2475 be defined instead.
2476 @end table
2477
2478 @node Elimination
2479 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
2480
2481 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2482 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
2483
2484 @table @code
2485 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2486 @item FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2487 A C expression which is nonzero if a function must have and use a frame
2488 pointer. This expression is evaluated in the reload pass. If its value is
2489 nonzero the function will have a frame pointer.
2490
2491 The expression can in principle examine the current function and decide
2492 according to the facts, but on most machines the constant 0 or the
2493 constant 1 suffices. Use 0 when the machine allows code to be generated
2494 with no frame pointer, and doing so saves some time or space. Use 1
2495 when there is no possible advantage to avoiding a frame pointer.
2496
2497 In certain cases, the compiler does not know how to produce valid code
2498 without a frame pointer. The compiler recognizes those cases and
2499 automatically gives the function a frame pointer regardless of what
2500 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} says. You don't need to worry about
2501 them.@refill
2502
2503 In a function that does not require a frame pointer, the frame pointer
2504 register can be allocated for ordinary usage, unless you mark it as a
2505 fixed register. See @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} for more information.
2506
2507 @findex INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET
2508 @findex get_frame_size
2509 @item INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
2510 A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
2511 between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
2512 the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
2513 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
2514 registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
2515
2516 If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
2517 need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
2518 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} is defined to always be true; in that
2519 case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
2520
2521 @findex ELIMINABLE_REGS
2522 @item ELIMINABLE_REGS
2523 If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
2524 eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
2525 defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
2526 references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
2527
2528 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
2529 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
2530
2531 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
2532 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
2533 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
2534 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
2535 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
2536
2537 In this case, you might specify:
2538 @example
2539 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
2540 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2541 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2542 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
2543 @end example
2544
2545 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
2546 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
2547
2548 @findex CAN_ELIMINATE
2549 @item CAN_ELIMINATE (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg})
2550 A C expression that returns non-zero if the compiler is allowed to try
2551 to replace register number @var{from-reg} with register number
2552 @var{to-reg}. This macro need only be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS}
2553 is defined, and will usually be the constant 1, since most of the cases
2554 preventing register elimination are things that the compiler already
2555 knows about.
2556
2557 @findex INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET
2558 @item INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
2559 This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
2560 specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
2561 registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
2562 defined.
2563
2564 @findex LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2565 @item LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2566 Define this macro if the @code{longjmp} function restores registers from
2567 the stack frames, rather than from those saved specifically by
2568 @code{setjmp}. Certain quantities must not be kept in registers across
2569 a call to @code{setjmp} on such machines.
2570 @end table
2571
2572 @node Stack Arguments
2573 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
2574 @cindex arguments on stack
2575 @cindex stack arguments
2576
2577 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
2578 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
2579 control passing certain arguments in registers.
2580
2581 @table @code
2582 @findex PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2583 @item PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2584 A C expression whose value is nonzero if an argument declared in
2585 a prototype as an integral type smaller than @code{int} should
2586 actually be passed as an @code{int}. In addition to avoiding
2587 errors in certain cases of mismatch, it also makes for better
2588 code on certain machines. If the macro is not defined in target
2589 header files, it defaults to 0.
2590
2591 @findex PUSH_ROUNDING
2592 @item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
2593 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
2594 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
2595
2596 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, do not define
2597 this macro. That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
2598 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
2599 it.
2600
2601 On some machines, the definition
2602
2603 @example
2604 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
2605 @end example
2606
2607 @noindent
2608 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
2609 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
2610 alignment. Then the definition should be
2611
2612 @example
2613 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
2614 @end example
2615
2616 @findex ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2617 @findex current_function_outgoing_args_size
2618 @item ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2619 If defined, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
2620 will be computed and placed into the variable
2621 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
2622 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
2623 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
2624
2625 Defining both @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
2626 is not proper.
2627
2628 @findex REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2629 @item REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
2630 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
2631 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
2632 registers.
2633
2634 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
2635 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
2636 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
2637
2638 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
2639 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
2640 which.
2641 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
2642 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
2643
2644 @findex MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2645 @findex FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2646 @item MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2647 @itemx FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{const_size}, @var{var_size})
2648 Define these macros in addition to the one above if functions might
2649 allocate stack space for arguments even when their values are passed
2650 in registers. These should be used when the stack space allocated
2651 for arguments in registers is not a simple constant independent of the
2652 function declaration.
2653
2654 The value of the first macro is the size, in bytes, of the area that
2655 we should initially assume would be reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2656
2657 The value of the second macro is the actual size, in bytes, of the area
2658 that will be reserved for arguments passed in registers. This takes two
2659 arguments: an integer representing the number of bytes of fixed sized
2660 arguments on the stack, and a tree representing the number of bytes of
2661 variable sized arguments on the stack.
2662
2663 When these macros are defined, @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} will only be
2664 called for libcall functions, the current function, or for a function
2665 being called when it is known that such stack space must be allocated.
2666 In each case this value can be easily computed.
2667
2668 When deciding whether a called function needs such stack space, and how
2669 much space to reserve, GCC uses these two macros instead of
2670 @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}.
2671
2672 @findex OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2673 @item OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2674 Define this if it is the responsibility of the caller to allocate the area
2675 reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2676
2677 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
2678 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
2679 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.
2680
2681 @findex STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2682 @item STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2683 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
2684 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
2685 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
2686 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
2687
2688 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
2689 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
2690 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
2691 stack in its natural location.
2692
2693 @findex RETURN_POPS_ARGS
2694 @item RETURN_POPS_ARGS (@var{fundecl}, @var{funtype}, @var{stack-size})
2695 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes of its own
2696 arguments that a function pops on returning, or 0 if the
2697 function pops no arguments and the caller must therefore pop them all
2698 after the function returns.
2699
2700 @var{fundecl} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that describes
2701 the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2702 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} that describes the declaration of the function.
2703 From this you can obtain the DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of the function.
2704
2705 @var{funtype} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that
2706 describes the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2707 @code{FUNCTION_TYPE} that describes the data type of the function.
2708 From this it is possible to obtain the data types of the value and
2709 arguments (if known).
2710
2711 When a call to a library function is being considered, @var{fundecl}
2712 will contain an identifier node for the library function. Thus, if
2713 you need to distinguish among various library functions, you can do so
2714 by their names. Note that ``library function'' in this context means
2715 a function used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known specially
2716 in the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being compiled.
2717
2718 @var{stack-size} is the number of bytes of arguments passed on the
2719 stack. If a variable number of bytes is passed, it is zero, and
2720 argument popping will always be the responsibility of the calling function.
2721
2722 On the Vax, all functions always pop their arguments, so the definition
2723 of this macro is @var{stack-size}. On the 68000, using the standard
2724 calling convention, no functions pop their arguments, so the value of
2725 the macro is always 0 in this case. But an alternative calling
2726 convention is available in which functions that take a fixed number of
2727 arguments pop them but other functions (such as @code{printf}) pop
2728 nothing (the caller pops all). When this convention is in use,
2729 @var{funtype} is examined to determine whether a function takes a fixed
2730 number of arguments.
2731 @end table
2732
2733 @node Register Arguments
2734 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
2735 @cindex arguments in registers
2736 @cindex registers arguments
2737
2738 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
2739 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
2740 the stack.
2741
2742 @table @code
2743 @findex FUNCTION_ARG
2744 @item FUNCTION_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2745 A C expression that controls whether a function argument is passed
2746 in a register, and which register.
2747
2748 The arguments are @var{cum}, which summarizes all the previous
2749 arguments; @var{mode}, the machine mode of the argument; @var{type},
2750 the data type of the argument as a tree node or 0 if that is not known
2751 (which happens for C support library functions); and @var{named},
2752 which is 1 for an ordinary argument and 0 for nameless arguments that
2753 correspond to @samp{@dots{}} in the called function's prototype.
2754
2755 The value of the expression is usually either a @code{reg} RTX for the
2756 hard register in which to pass the argument, or zero to pass the
2757 argument on the stack.
2758
2759 For machines like the Vax and 68000, where normally all arguments are
2760 pushed, zero suffices as a definition.
2761
2762 The value of the expression can also be a @code{parallel} RTX. This is
2763 used when an argument is passed in multiple locations. The mode of the
2764 of the @code{parallel} should be the mode of the entire argument. The
2765 @code{parallel} holds any number of @code{expr_list} pairs; each one
2766 describes where part of the argument is passed. In each
2767 @code{expr_list} the first operand must be a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
2768 register in which to pass this part of the argument, and the mode of the
2769 register RTX indicates how large this part of the argument is. The
2770 second operand of the @code{expr_list} is a @code{const_int} which gives
2771 the offset in bytes into the entire argument of where this part starts.
2772 As a special exception the first @code{expr_list} in the @code{parallel}
2773 RTX may have a first operand of zero. This indicates that the entire
2774 argument is also stored on the stack.
2775
2776 @cindex @file{stdarg.h} and register arguments
2777 The usual way to make the ANSI library @file{stdarg.h} work on a machine
2778 where some arguments are usually passed in registers, is to cause
2779 nameless arguments to be passed on the stack instead. This is done
2780 by making @code{FUNCTION_ARG} return 0 whenever @var{named} is 0.
2781
2782 @cindex @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2783 @cindex @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2784 You may use the macro @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})}
2785 in the definition of this macro to determine if this argument is of a
2786 type that must be passed in the stack. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}
2787 is not defined and @code{FUNCTION_ARG} returns non-zero for such an
2788 argument, the compiler will abort. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is
2789 defined, the argument will be computed in the stack and then loaded into
2790 a register.
2791
2792 @findex MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
2793 @item MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2794 Define as a C expression that evaluates to nonzero if we do not know how
2795 to pass TYPE solely in registers. The file @file{expr.h} defines a
2796 definition that is usually appropriate, refer to @file{expr.h} for additional
2797 documentation.
2798
2799 @findex FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
2800 @item FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2801 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows'', so
2802 that the register in which a function sees an arguments is not
2803 necessarily the same as the one in which the caller passed the
2804 argument.
2805
2806 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_ARG} computes the register in which
2807 the caller passes the value, and @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} should
2808 be defined in a similar fashion to tell the function being called
2809 where the arguments will arrive.
2810
2811 If @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} is not defined, @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2812 serves both purposes.@refill
2813
2814 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
2815 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2816 A C expression for the number of words, at the beginning of an
2817 argument, must be put in registers. The value must be zero for
2818 arguments that are passed entirely in registers or that are entirely
2819 pushed on the stack.
2820
2821 On some machines, certain arguments must be passed partially in
2822 registers and partially in memory. On these machines, typically the
2823 first @var{n} words of arguments are passed in registers, and the rest
2824 on the stack. If a multi-word argument (a @code{double} or a
2825 structure) crosses that boundary, its first few words must be passed
2826 in registers and the rest must be pushed. This macro tells the
2827 compiler when this occurs, and how many of the words should go in
2828 registers.
2829
2830 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for these arguments should return the first
2831 register to be used by the caller for this argument; likewise
2832 @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG}, for the called function.
2833
2834 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
2835 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2836 A C expression that indicates when an argument must be passed by reference.
2837 If nonzero for an argument, a copy of that argument is made in memory and a
2838 pointer to the argument is passed instead of the argument itself.
2839 The pointer is passed in whatever way is appropriate for passing a pointer
2840 to that type.
2841
2842 On machines where @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is not defined, a suitable
2843 definition of this macro might be
2844 @smallexample
2845 #define FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE\
2846 (CUM, MODE, TYPE, NAMED) \
2847 MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (MODE, TYPE)
2848 @end smallexample
2849 @c this is *still* too long. --mew 5feb93
2850
2851 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES
2852 @item FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2853 If defined, a C expression that indicates when it is the called function's
2854 responsibility to make a copy of arguments passed by invisible reference.
2855 Normally, the caller makes a copy and passes the address of the copy to the
2856 routine being called. When FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES is defined and is
2857 nonzero, the caller does not make a copy. Instead, it passes a pointer to the
2858 ``live'' value. The called function must not modify this value. If it can be
2859 determined that the value won't be modified, it need not make a copy;
2860 otherwise a copy must be made.
2861
2862 @findex CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2863 @item CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2864 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument of
2865 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some target machines,
2866 the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number of bytes of
2867 argument so far.
2868
2869 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
2870 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
2871 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
2872 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
2873 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
2874 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
2875
2876 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2877 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{indirect})
2878 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable @var{cum}
2879 for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The variable has
2880 type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype} is the tree node
2881 for the data type of the function which will receive the args, or 0
2882 if the args are to a compiler support library function. The value of
2883 @var{indirect} is nonzero when processing an indirect call, for example
2884 a call through a function pointer. The value of @var{indirect} is zero
2885 for a call to an explicitly named function, a library function call, or when
2886 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
2887 being compiled.
2888
2889 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
2890 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
2891 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
2892 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
2893 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
2894 never both of them at once.
2895
2896 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS
2897 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
2898 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
2899 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
2900 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
2901
2902 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
2903 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC. The
2904 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
2905 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
2906 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
2907 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
2908
2909 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
2910 @item FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2911 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the summarizer variable
2912 @var{cum} to advance past an argument in the argument list. The
2913 values @var{mode}, @var{type} and @var{named} describe that argument.
2914 Once this is done, the variable @var{cum} is suitable for analyzing
2915 the @emph{following} argument with @code{FUNCTION_ARG}, etc.@refill
2916
2917 This macro need not do anything if the argument in question was passed
2918 on the stack. The compiler knows how to track the amount of stack space
2919 used for arguments without any special help.
2920
2921 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
2922 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2923 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
2924 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
2925 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
2926 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
2927
2928 The @emph{amount} of padding is always just enough to reach the next
2929 multiple of @code{FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY}; this macro does not control
2930 it.
2931
2932 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
2933 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
2934 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
2935 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
2936
2937 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
2938 @item FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2939 If defined, a C expression that gives the alignment boundary, in bits,
2940 of an argument with the specified mode and type. If it is not defined,
2941 @code{PARM_BOUNDARY} is used for all arguments.
2942
2943 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P
2944 @item FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
2945 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
2946 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
2947 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
2948 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
2949 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
2950 stack.
2951
2952 @findex LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
2953 @item LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
2954 If defined, the order in which arguments are loaded into their
2955 respective argument registers is reversed so that the last
2956 argument is loaded first. This macro only affects arguments
2957 passed in registers.
2958
2959 @end table
2960
2961 @node Scalar Return
2962 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
2963 @cindex return values in registers
2964 @cindex values, returned by functions
2965 @cindex scalars, returned as values
2966
2967 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
2968 values---values that can fit in registers.
2969
2970 @table @code
2971 @findex TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
2972 @item TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
2973 Define this macro if @samp{-traditional} should not cause functions
2974 declared to return @code{float} to convert the value to @code{double}.
2975
2976 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE
2977 @item FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
2978 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a
2979 function returns a value of data type @var{valtype}. @var{valtype} is
2980 a tree node representing a data type. Write @code{TYPE_MODE
2981 (@var{valtype})} to get the machine mode used to represent that type.
2982 On many machines, only the mode is relevant. (Actually, on most
2983 machines, scalar values are returned in the same place regardless of
2984 mode).@refill
2985
2986 The value of the expression is usually a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
2987 register where the return value is stored. The value can also be a
2988 @code{parallel} RTX, if the return value is in multiple places. See
2989 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for an explanation of the @code{parallel} form.
2990
2991 If @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN} is defined, you must apply the same
2992 promotion rules specified in @code{PROMOTE_MODE} if @var{valtype} is a
2993 scalar type.
2994
2995 If the precise function being called is known, @var{func} is a tree
2996 node (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
2997 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
2998 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
2999 known.@refill
3000
3001 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} is not used for return vales with aggregate data
3002 types, because these are returned in another way. See
3003 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3004
3005 @findex FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE
3006 @item FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3007 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows''
3008 so that the register in which a function returns its value is not
3009 the same as the one in which the caller sees the value.
3010
3011 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} computes the register in which
3012 the caller will see the value. @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} should be
3013 defined in a similar fashion to tell the function where to put the
3014 value.@refill
3015
3016 If @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not defined,
3017 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} serves both purposes.@refill
3018
3019 @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not used for return vales with
3020 aggregate data types, because these are returned in another way. See
3021 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3022
3023 @findex LIBCALL_VALUE
3024 @item LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3025 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3026 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}. If the precise function
3027 being called is known, @var{func} is a tree node
3028 (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
3029 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
3030 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
3031 known.@refill
3032
3033 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3034 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3035 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3036 compiled.
3037
3038 The definition of @code{LIBRARY_VALUE} need not be concerned aggregate
3039 data types, because none of the library functions returns such types.
3040
3041 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3042 @item FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3043 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3044 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3045
3046 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3047 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3048 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3049 suffices:
3050
3051 @example
3052 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3053 @end example
3054
3055 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3056 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3057 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3058
3059 @findex APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3060 @item APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3061 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3062 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3063 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3064 @end table
3065
3066 @node Aggregate Return
3067 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3068 @cindex aggregates as return values
3069 @cindex large return values
3070 @cindex returning aggregate values
3071 @cindex structure value address
3072
3073 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3074 cases), the value is not returned according to @code{FUNCTION_VALUE}
3075 (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the caller passes the address of a
3076 block of memory in which the value should be stored. This address
3077 is called the @dfn{structure value address}.
3078
3079 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3080 memory.
3081
3082 @table @code
3083 @findex RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3084 @item RETURN_IN_MEMORY (@var{type})
3085 A C expression which can inhibit the returning of certain function
3086 values in registers, based on the type of value. A nonzero value says
3087 to return the function value in memory, just as large structures are
3088 always returned. Here @var{type} will be a C expression of type
3089 @code{tree}, representing the data type of the value.
3090
3091 Note that values of mode @code{BLKmode} must be explicitly handled
3092 by this macro. Also, the option @samp{-fpcc-struct-return}
3093 takes effect regardless of this macro. On most systems, it is
3094 possible to leave the macro undefined; this causes a default
3095 definition to be used, whose value is the constant 1 for @code{BLKmode}
3096 values, and 0 otherwise.
3097
3098 Do not use this macro to indicate that structures and unions should always
3099 be returned in memory. You should instead use @code{DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN}
3100 to indicate this.
3101
3102 @findex DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3103 @item DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3104 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3105 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3106 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI.
3107 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3108 and union return values are decided by the @code{RETURN_IN_MEMORY} macro.
3109
3110 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3111
3112 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3113 @item STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3114 If the structure value address is passed in a register, then
3115 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} should be the number of that register.
3116
3117 @findex STRUCT_VALUE
3118 @item STRUCT_VALUE
3119 If the structure value address is not passed in a register, define
3120 @code{STRUCT_VALUE} as an expression returning an RTX for the place
3121 where the address is passed. If it returns 0, the address is passed as
3122 an ``invisible'' first argument.
3123
3124 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3125 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3126 On some architectures the place where the structure value address
3127 is found by the called function is not the same place that the
3128 caller put it. This can be due to register windows, or it could
3129 be because the function prologue moves it to a different place.
3130
3131 If the incoming location of the structure value address is in a
3132 register, define this macro as the register number.
3133
3134 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3135 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3136 If the incoming location is not a register, then you should define
3137 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING} as an expression for an RTX for where the
3138 called function should find the value. If it should find the value on
3139 the stack, define this to create a @code{mem} which refers to the frame
3140 pointer. A definition of 0 means that the address is passed as an
3141 ``invisible'' first argument.
3142
3143 @findex PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3144 @item PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3145 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3146 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3147 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3148
3149 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3150 pass an address to the subroutine.
3151
3152 This macro has effect in @samp{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3153 nothing when you use @samp{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3154 @end table
3155
3156 @node Caller Saves
3157 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3158
3159 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3160 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3161 must live across calls.
3162
3163 @table @code
3164 @findex DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3165 @item DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3166 Define this macro if function calls on the target machine do not preserve
3167 any registers; in other words, if @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} has 1
3168 for all registers. When defined, this macro enables @samp{-fcaller-saves}
3169 by default for all optimization levels. It has no effect for optimization
3170 levels 2 and higher, where @samp{-fcaller-saves} is the default.
3171
3172 @findex CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE
3173 @item CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE (@var{refs}, @var{calls})
3174 A C expression to determine whether it is worthwhile to consider placing
3175 a pseudo-register in a call-clobbered hard register and saving and
3176 restoring it around each function call. The expression should be 1 when
3177 this is worth doing, and 0 otherwise.
3178
3179 If you don't define this macro, a default is used which is good on most
3180 machines: @code{4 * @var{calls} < @var{refs}}.
3181
3182 @findex HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE
3183 @item HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3184 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3185 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3186 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3187 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3188 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3189 @end table
3190
3191 @node Function Entry
3192 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3193 @cindex function entry and exit
3194 @cindex prologue
3195 @cindex epilogue
3196
3197 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3198 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3199
3200 @table @code
3201 @findex FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3202 @item FUNCTION_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3203 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for entry to a
3204 function. The prologue is responsible for setting up the stack frame,
3205 initializing the frame pointer register, saving registers that must be
3206 saved, and allocating @var{size} additional bytes of storage for the
3207 local variables. @var{size} is an integer. @var{file} is a stdio
3208 stream to which the assembler code should be output.
3209
3210 The label for the beginning of the function need not be output by this
3211 macro. That has already been done when the macro is run.
3212
3213 @findex regs_ever_live
3214 To determine which registers to save, the macro can refer to the array
3215 @code{regs_ever_live}: element @var{r} is nonzero if hard register
3216 @var{r} is used anywhere within the function. This implies the function
3217 prologue should save register @var{r}, provided it is not one of the
3218 call-used registers. (@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must likewise use
3219 @code{regs_ever_live}.)
3220
3221 On machines that have ``register windows'', the function entry code does
3222 not save on the stack the registers that are in the windows, even if
3223 they are supposed to be preserved by function calls; instead it takes
3224 appropriate steps to ``push'' the register stack, if any non-call-used
3225 registers are used in the function.
3226
3227 @findex frame_pointer_needed
3228 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3229 function entry code must vary accordingly; it must set up the frame
3230 pointer if one is wanted, and not otherwise. To determine whether a
3231 frame pointer is in wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3232 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 at run
3233 time in a function that needs a frame pointer. @xref{Elimination}.
3234
3235 The function entry code is responsible for allocating any stack space
3236 required for the function. This stack space consists of the regions
3237 listed below. In most cases, these regions are allocated in the
3238 order listed, with the last listed region closest to the top of the
3239 stack (the lowest address if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and
3240 the highest address if it is not defined). You can use a different order
3241 for a machine if doing so is more convenient or required for
3242 compatibility reasons. Except in cases where required by standard
3243 or by a debugger, there is no reason why the stack layout used by GCC
3244 need agree with that used by other compilers for a machine.
3245
3246 @itemize @bullet
3247 @item
3248 @findex current_function_pretend_args_size
3249 A region of @code{current_function_pretend_args_size} bytes of
3250 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3251 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3252 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3253 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3254 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3255 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3256 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3257 features in @file{varargs.h} and @file{stdargs.h}.
3258
3259 @item
3260 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3261 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3262 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3263 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3264 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3265 a save area.
3266
3267 @item
3268 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3269 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3270 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3271 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3272
3273 @item
3274 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3275 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3276 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3277 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3278 @end itemize
3279
3280 Normally, it is necessary for the macros @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3281 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to treat leaf functions specially. The C
3282 variable @code{current_function_is_leaf} is nonzero for such a function.
3283
3284 @findex EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3285 @item EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3286 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3287 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3288 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3289 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function.
3290
3291 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3292 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3293 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3294 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3295
3296 @findex EPILOGUE_USES
3297 @item EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3298 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers are
3299 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3300 pointer registers are already be assumed to be used as needed.
3301
3302 @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3303 @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3304 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for exit from a
3305 function. The epilogue is responsible for restoring the saved
3306 registers and stack pointer to their values when the function was
3307 called, and returning control to the caller. This macro takes the
3308 same arguments as the macro @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}, and the
3309 registers to restore are determined from @code{regs_ever_live} and
3310 @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} in the same way.
3311
3312 On some machines, there is a single instruction that does all the work
3313 of returning from the function. On these machines, give that
3314 instruction the name @samp{return} and do not define the macro
3315 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} at all.
3316
3317 Do not define a pattern named @samp{return} if you want the
3318 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to be used. If you want the target switches
3319 to control whether return instructions or epilogues are used, define a
3320 @samp{return} pattern with a validity condition that tests the target
3321 switches appropriately. If the @samp{return} pattern's validity
3322 condition is false, epilogues will be used.
3323
3324 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3325 function exit code must vary accordingly. Sometimes the code for these
3326 two cases is completely different. To determine whether a frame pointer
3327 is wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3328 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 when compiling
3329 a function that needs a frame pointer.
3330
3331 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
3332 treat leaf functions specially. The C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
3333 is nonzero for such a function. @xref{Leaf Functions}.
3334
3335 On some machines, some functions pop their arguments on exit while
3336 others leave that for the caller to do. For example, the 68020 when
3337 given @samp{-mrtd} pops arguments in functions that take a fixed
3338 number of arguments.
3339
3340 @findex current_function_pops_args
3341 Your definition of the macro @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} decides which
3342 functions pop their own arguments. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} needs to
3343 know what was decided. The variable that is called
3344 @code{current_function_pops_args} is the number of bytes of its
3345 arguments that a function should pop. @xref{Scalar Return}.
3346 @c what is the "its arguments" in the above sentence referring to, pray
3347 @c tell? --mew 5feb93
3348
3349 @findex DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3350 @item DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3351 Define this macro if the function epilogue contains delay slots to which
3352 instructions from the rest of the function can be ``moved''. The
3353 definition should be a C expression whose value is an integer
3354 representing the number of delay slots there.
3355
3356 @findex ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY
3357 @item ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY (@var{insn}, @var{n})
3358 A C expression that returns 1 if @var{insn} can be placed in delay
3359 slot number @var{n} of the epilogue.
3360
3361 The argument @var{n} is an integer which identifies the delay slot now
3362 being considered (since different slots may have different rules of
3363 eligibility). It is never negative and is always less than the number
3364 of epilogue delay slots (what @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE} returns).
3365 If you reject a particular insn for a given delay slot, in principle, it
3366 may be reconsidered for a subsequent delay slot. Also, other insns may
3367 (at least in principle) be considered for the so far unfilled delay
3368 slot.
3369
3370 @findex current_function_epilogue_delay_list
3371 @findex final_scan_insn
3372 The insns accepted to fill the epilogue delay slots are put in an RTL
3373 list made with @code{insn_list} objects, stored in the variable
3374 @code{current_function_epilogue_delay_list}. The insn for the first
3375 delay slot comes first in the list. Your definition of the macro
3376 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} should fill the delay slots by outputting the
3377 insns in this list, usually by calling @code{final_scan_insn}.
3378
3379 You need not define this macro if you did not define
3380 @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE}.
3381
3382 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3383 @item ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK (@var{file}, @var{thunk_fndecl}, @var{delta}, @var{function})
3384 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for a thunk
3385 function, used to implement C++ virtual function calls with multiple
3386 inheritance. The thunk acts as a wrapper around a virtual function,
3387 adjusting the implicit object parameter before handing control off to
3388 the real function.
3389
3390 First, emit code to add the integer @var{delta} to the location that
3391 contains the incoming first argument. Assume that this argument
3392 contains a pointer, and is the one used to pass the @code{this} pointer
3393 in C++. This is the incoming argument @emph{before} the function prologue,
3394 e.g. @samp{%o0} on a sparc. The addition must preserve the values of
3395 all other incoming arguments.
3396
3397 After the addition, emit code to jump to @var{function}, which is a
3398 @code{FUNCTION_DECL}. This is a direct pure jump, not a call, and does
3399 not touch the return address. Hence returning from @var{FUNCTION} will
3400 return to whoever called the current @samp{thunk}.
3401
3402 The effect must be as if @var{function} had been called directly with
3403 the adjusted first argument. This macro is responsible for emitting all
3404 of the code for a thunk function; @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3405 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} are not invoked.
3406
3407 The @var{thunk_fndecl} is redundant. (@var{delta} and @var{function}
3408 have already been extracted from it.) It might possibly be useful on
3409 some targets, but probably not.
3410
3411 If you do not define this macro, the target-independent code in the C++
3412 frontend will generate a less efficient heavyweight thunk that calls
3413 @var{function} instead of jumping to it. The generic approach does
3414 not support varargs.
3415 @end table
3416
3417 @node Profiling
3418 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3419 @cindex profiling, code generation
3420
3421 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3422
3423 @table @code
3424 @findex FUNCTION_PROFILER
3425 @item FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3426 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3427 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3428 Before calling, the assembler code must load the address of a
3429 counter variable into a register where @code{mcount} expects to
3430 find the address. The name of this variable is @samp{LP} followed
3431 by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate the name using
3432 @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3433
3434 @findex mcount
3435 The details of how the address should be passed to @code{mcount} are
3436 determined by your operating system environment, not by GCC. To
3437 figure them out, compile a small program for profiling using the
3438 system's installed C compiler and look at the assembler code that
3439 results.
3440
3441 @findex PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3442 @item PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3443 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3444 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3445
3446 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER
3447 @vindex profile_block_flag
3448 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3449 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3450 assembler code to initialize basic-block profiling for the current
3451 object module. The global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag}
3452 distinguishes two profile modes.
3453
3454 @table @code
3455 @findex __bb_init_func
3456 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3457 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_func} once per
3458 object module, passing it as its sole argument the address of a block
3459 allocated in the object module.
3460
3461 The name of the block is a local symbol made with this statement:
3462
3463 @smallexample
3464 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3465 @end smallexample
3466
3467 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3468 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3469 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3470 that you know will result.
3471
3472 The first word of this block is a flag which will be nonzero if the
3473 object module has already been initialized. So test this word first,
3474 and do not call @code{__bb_init_func} if the flag is
3475 nonzero. BLOCK_OR_LABEL contains a unique number which may be used to
3476 generate a label as a branch destination when @code{__bb_init_func}
3477 will not be called.
3478
3479 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3480
3481 @example
3482 cmp (LPBX0),0
3483 bne local_label
3484 parameter1 <- LPBX0
3485 call __bb_init_func
3486 local_label:
3487 @end example
3488
3489 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3490 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3491 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_trace_func}
3492 and pass two parameters to it. The first parameter is the same as
3493 for @code{__bb_init_func}. The second parameter is the number of the
3494 first basic block of the function as given by BLOCK_OR_LABEL. Note
3495 that @code{__bb_init_trace_func} has to be called, even if the object
3496 module has been initialized already.
3497
3498 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3499 @example
3500 parameter1 <- LPBX0
3501 parameter2 <- BLOCK_OR_LABEL
3502 call __bb_init_trace_func
3503 @end example
3504 @end table
3505
3506 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER
3507 @vindex profile_block_flag
3508 @item BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{blockno})
3509 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3510 assembler code to increment the count associated with the basic
3511 block number @var{blockno}. The global compile flag
3512 @code{profile_block_flag} distinguishes two profile modes.
3513
3514 @table @code
3515 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3516 Output code to increment the counter directly. Basic blocks are
3517 numbered separately from zero within each compilation. The count
3518 associated with block number @var{blockno} is at index
3519 @var{blockno} in a vector of words; the name of this array is a local
3520 symbol made with this statement:
3521
3522 @smallexample
3523 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 2);
3524 @end smallexample
3525
3526 @c This paragraph is the same as one a few paragraphs up.
3527 @c That is not an error.
3528 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3529 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3530 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3531 that you know will result.
3532
3533 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3534
3535 @smallexample
3536 inc (LPBX2+4*BLOCKNO)
3537 @end smallexample
3538
3539 @vindex __bb
3540 @findex __bb_trace_func
3541 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3542 Output code to initialize the global structure @code{__bb} and
3543 call the function @code{__bb_trace_func}, which will increment the
3544 counter.
3545
3546 @code{__bb} consists of two words. In the first word, the current
3547 basic block number, as given by BLOCKNO, has to be stored. In
3548 the second word, the address of a block allocated in the object
3549 module has to be stored. The address is given by the label created
3550 with this statement:
3551
3552 @smallexample
3553 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3554 @end smallexample
3555
3556 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3557 @example
3558 move BLOCKNO -> (__bb)
3559 move LPBX0 -> (__bb+4)
3560 call __bb_trace_func
3561 @end example
3562 @end table
3563
3564 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT
3565 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3566 @vindex profile_block_flag
3567 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT (@var{file})
3568 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file}
3569 assembler code to call function @code{__bb_trace_ret}. The
3570 assembler code should only be output
3571 if the global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag} == 2. This
3572 macro has to be used at every place where code for returning from
3573 a function is generated (e.g. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}). Although
3574 you have to write the definition of @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}
3575 as well, you have to define this macro to tell the compiler, that
3576 the proper call to @code{__bb_trace_ret} is produced.
3577
3578 @findex MACHINE_STATE_SAVE
3579 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3580 @findex __bb_trace_func
3581 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3582 @item MACHINE_STATE_SAVE (@var{id})
3583 A C statement or compound statement to save all registers, which may
3584 be clobbered by a function call, including condition codes. The
3585 @code{asm} statement will be mostly likely needed to handle this
3586 task. Local labels in the assembler code can be concatenated with the
3587 string @var{id}, to obtain a unique lable name.
3588
3589 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3590 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be saved in the macros
3591 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3592 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} prior calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3593 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3594
3595 @findex MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE
3596 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3597 @findex __bb_trace_func
3598 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3599 @item MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE (@var{id})
3600 A C statement or compound statement to restore all registers, including
3601 condition codes, saved by @code{MACHINE_STATE_SAVE}.
3602
3603 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3604 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be restored in the macros
3605 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3606 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} after calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3607 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3608
3609 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3610 @item BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3611 A C function or functions which are needed in the library to
3612 support block profiling.
3613 @end table
3614
3615 @node Varargs
3616 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3617 @cindex varargs implementation
3618
3619 GCC comes with an implementation of @file{varargs.h} and
3620 @file{stdarg.h} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3621 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3622 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3623 conditionals to include it.
3624
3625 ANSI @file{stdarg.h} differs from traditional @file{varargs.h} mainly in
3626 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3627 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3628 to store the argument pointer. The ANSI implementation of
3629 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3630 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3631
3632 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3633 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3634 below.
3635
3636 @table @code
3637 @findex __builtin_saveregs
3638 @item __builtin_saveregs ()
3639 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3640 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ANSI and traditional
3641 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3642 you use @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3643
3644 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3645 control of the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On other machines,
3646 it calls a routine written in assembler language, found in
3647 @file{libgcc2.c}.
3648
3649 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3650 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3651 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3652 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3653 to use them for its own purposes.
3654 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3655 @c 10feb93
3656
3657 @findex __builtin_args_info
3658 @item __builtin_args_info (@var{category})
3659 Use this built-in function to find the first anonymous arguments in
3660 registers.
3661
3662 In general, a machine may have several categories of registers used for
3663 arguments, each for a particular category of data types. (For example,
3664 on some machines, floating-point registers are used for floating-point
3665 arguments while other arguments are passed in the general registers.)
3666 To make non-varargs functions use the proper calling convention, you
3667 have defined the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data type to record how many
3668 registers in each category have been used so far
3669
3670 @code{__builtin_args_info} accesses the same data structure of type
3671 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} after the ordinary argument layout is finished
3672 with it, with @var{category} specifying which word to access. Thus, the
3673 value indicates the first unused register in a given category.
3674
3675 Normally, you would use @code{__builtin_args_info} in the implementation
3676 of @code{va_start}, accessing each category just once and storing the
3677 value in the @code{va_list} object. This is because @code{va_list} will
3678 have to update the values, and there is no way to alter the
3679 values accessed by @code{__builtin_args_info}.
3680
3681 @findex __builtin_next_arg
3682 @item __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3683 This is the equivalent of @code{__builtin_args_info}, for stack
3684 arguments. It returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3685 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3686 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3687 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3688 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3689 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3690 of the current function.
3691
3692 @findex __builtin_classify_type
3693 @item __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3694 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3695 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3696 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3697 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3698 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3699
3700 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3701 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3702 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3703
3704 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3705 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3706 @end table
3707
3708 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3709
3710 @table @code
3711 @findex EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3712 @item EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS ()
3713 If defined, is a C expression that produces the machine-specific code
3714 for a call to @code{__builtin_saveregs}. This code will be moved to the
3715 very beginning of the function, before any parameter access are made.
3716 The return value of this function should be an RTX that contains the
3717 value to use as the return of @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
3718
3719 @findex SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3720 @item SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS (@var{args_so_far}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{pretend_args_size}, @var{second_time})
3721 This macro offers an alternative to using @code{__builtin_saveregs} and
3722 defining the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. Use it to store the
3723 anonymous register arguments into the stack so that all the arguments
3724 appear to have been passed consecutively on the stack. Once this is
3725 done, you can use the standard implementation of varargs that works for
3726 machines that pass all their arguments on the stack.
3727
3728 The argument @var{args_so_far} is the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data
3729 structure, containing the values that obtain after processing of the
3730 named arguments. The arguments @var{mode} and @var{type} describe the
3731 last named argument---its machine mode and its data type as a tree node.
3732
3733 The macro implementation should do two things: first, push onto the
3734 stack all the argument registers @emph{not} used for the named
3735 arguments, and second, store the size of the data thus pushed into the
3736 @code{int}-valued variable whose name is supplied as the argument
3737 @var{pretend_args_size}. The value that you store here will serve as
3738 additional offset for setting up the stack frame.
3739
3740 Because you must generate code to push the anonymous arguments at
3741 compile time without knowing their data types,
3742 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is only useful on machines that have just
3743 a single category of argument register and use it uniformly for all data
3744 types.
3745
3746 If the argument @var{second_time} is nonzero, it means that the
3747 arguments of the function are being analyzed for the second time. This
3748 happens for an inline function, which is not actually compiled until the
3749 end of the source file. The macro @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} should
3750 not generate any instructions in this case.
3751
3752 @findex STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3753 @item STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3754 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the location where a function
3755 argument is passed depends on whether or not it is a named argument.
3756
3757 This macro controls how the @var{named} argument to @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
3758 is set for varargs and stdarg functions. If this macro returns a
3759 nonzero value, the @var{named} argument is always true for named
3760 arguments, and false for unnamed arguments. If it returns a value of
3761 zero, but @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is defined, then all arguments
3762 are treated as named. Otherwise, all named arguments except the last
3763 are treated as named.
3764
3765 You need not define this macro if it always returns zero.
3766
3767 @findex PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3768 @item PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3769 If you need to conditionally change ABIs so that one works with
3770 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS}, but the other works like neither
3771 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} nor @code{STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING} was
3772 defined, then define this macro to return nonzero if
3773 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is used, zero otherwise.
3774 Otherwise, you should not define this macro.
3775 @end table
3776
3777 @node Trampolines
3778 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3779 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3780 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3781
3782 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3783 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3784 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3785 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3786 trampoline.
3787
3788 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3789 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3790 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3791 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3792 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3793 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3794 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3795 operands.
3796
3797 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3798 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3799 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3800 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3801 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3802 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3803 separately.
3804
3805 @table @code
3806 @findex TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3807 @item TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE (@var{file})
3808 A C statement to output, on the stream @var{file}, assembler code for a
3809 block of data that contains the constant parts of a trampoline. This
3810 code should not include a label---the label is taken care of
3811 automatically.
3812
3813 If you do not define this macro, it means no template is needed
3814 for the target. Do not define this macro on systems where the block move
3815 code to copy the trampoline into place would be larger than the code
3816 to generate it on the spot.
3817
3818 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3819 @item TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3820 The name of a subroutine to switch to the section in which the
3821 trampoline template is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is
3822 a value of @samp{readonly_data_section}, which places the trampoline in
3823 the section containing read-only data.
3824
3825 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3826 @item TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3827 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3828
3829 @findex TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3830 @item TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3831 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3832
3833 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
3834 is used for aligning trampolines.
3835
3836 @findex INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE
3837 @item INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{addr}, @var{fnaddr}, @var{static_chain})
3838 A C statement to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
3839 @var{addr} is an RTX for the address of the trampoline; @var{fnaddr} is
3840 an RTX for the address of the nested function; @var{static_chain} is an
3841 RTX for the static chain value that should be passed to the function
3842 when it is called.
3843
3844 @findex ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE
3845 @item ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{fp})
3846 A C expression to allocate run-time space for a trampoline. The
3847 expression value should be an RTX representing a memory reference to the
3848 space for the trampoline.
3849
3850 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} and trampolines
3851 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and trampolines
3852 If this macro is not defined, by default the trampoline is allocated as
3853 a stack slot. This default is right for most machines. The exceptions
3854 are machines where it is impossible to execute instructions in the stack
3855 area. On such machines, you may have to implement a separate stack,
3856 using this macro in conjunction with @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3857 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}.
3858
3859 @var{fp} points to a data structure, a @code{struct function}, which
3860 describes the compilation status of the immediate containing function of
3861 the function which the trampoline is for. Normally (when
3862 @code{ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE} is not defined), the stack slot for the
3863 trampoline is in the stack frame of this containing function. Other
3864 allocation strategies probably must do something analogous with this
3865 information.
3866 @end table
3867
3868 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3869 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3870 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3871 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3872
3873 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3874 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3875 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3876 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3877 latter makes initialization faster.
3878
3879 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3880 the following macros which describe the shape of the cache.
3881
3882 @table @code
3883 @findex INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3884 @item INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3885 The total size in bytes of the cache.
3886
3887 @findex INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3888 @item INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3889 The length in bytes of each cache line. The cache is divided into cache
3890 lines which are disjoint slots, each holding a contiguous chunk of data
3891 fetched from memory. Each time data is brought into the cache, an
3892 entire line is read at once. The data loaded into a cache line is
3893 always aligned on a boundary equal to the line size.
3894
3895 @findex INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3896 @item INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3897 The number of alternative cache lines that can hold any particular memory
3898 location.
3899 @end table
3900
3901 Alternatively, if the machine has system calls or instructions to clear
3902 the instruction cache directly, you can define the following macro.
3903
3904 @table @code
3905 @findex CLEAR_INSN_CACHE
3906 @item CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{BEG}, @var{END})
3907 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3908 cache} in the specified interval. If it is not defined, and the macro
3909 INSN_CACHE_SIZE is defined, some generic code is generated to clear the
3910 cache. The definition of this macro would typically be a series of
3911 @code{asm} statements. Both @var{BEG} and @var{END} are both pointer
3912 expressions.
3913 @end table
3914
3915 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3916 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3917 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3918 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3919 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3920
3921 @table @code
3922 @findex TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3923 @item TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3924 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3925 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3926 which will be compiled with GCC. They go in a library function named
3927 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3928
3929 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3930 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3931 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3932 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3933 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3934 special assembler code.
3935 @end table
3936
3937 @node Library Calls
3938 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3939 @cindex library subroutine names
3940 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3941
3942 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3943 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3944
3945 @table @code
3946 @findex MULSI3_LIBCALL
3947 @item MULSI3_LIBCALL
3948 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3949 multiplication of one signed full-word by another. If you do not
3950 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__mulsi3},
3951 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3952
3953 @findex DIVSI3_LIBCALL
3954 @item DIVSI3_LIBCALL
3955 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3956 division of one signed full-word by another. If you do not define
3957 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divsi3}, a
3958 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3959
3960 @findex UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
3961 @item UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
3962 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3963 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
3964 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivsi3}, a
3965 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3966
3967 @findex MODSI3_LIBCALL
3968 @item MODSI3_LIBCALL
3969 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3970 remainder in division of one signed full-word by another. If you do
3971 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3972 @code{__modsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3973
3974 @findex UMODSI3_LIBCALL
3975 @item UMODSI3_LIBCALL
3976 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3977 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
3978 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
3979 @code{__umodsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3980
3981 @findex MULDI3_LIBCALL
3982 @item MULDI3_LIBCALL
3983 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3984 multiplication of one signed double-word by another. If you do not
3985 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__muldi3},
3986 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3987
3988 @findex DIVDI3_LIBCALL
3989 @item DIVDI3_LIBCALL
3990 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3991 division of one signed double-word by another. If you do not define
3992 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divdi3}, a
3993 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3994
3995 @findex UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
3996 @item UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
3997 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3998 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
3999 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivdi3}, a
4000 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4001
4002 @findex MODDI3_LIBCALL
4003 @item MODDI3_LIBCALL
4004 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4005 remainder in division of one signed double-word by another. If you do
4006 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4007 @code{__moddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4008
4009 @findex UMODDI3_LIBCALL
4010 @item UMODDI3_LIBCALL
4011 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4012 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
4013 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4014 @code{__umoddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4015
4016 @findex INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4017 @item INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4018 Define this macro as a C statement that declares additional library
4019 routines renames existing ones. @code{init_optabs} calls this macro after
4020 initializing all the normal library routines.
4021
4022 @findex FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
4023 @item FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL
4024 Define this macro as a C statement that returns nonzero if a call to
4025 the floating point comparison library function will return a boolean
4026 value that indicates the result of the comparison. It should return
4027 zero if one of gcc's own libgcc functions is called.
4028
4029 Most ports don't need to define this macro.
4030
4031 @findex TARGET_EDOM
4032 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4033 @item TARGET_EDOM
4034 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4035 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4036 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4037 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4038 system.
4039
4040 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4041 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4042 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4043 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4044 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4045
4046 @findex GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4047 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4048 @item GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4049 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4050 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4051 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4052 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4053
4054 @findex TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4055 @cindex @code{bcopy}, implicit usage
4056 @cindex @code{memcpy}, implicit usage
4057 @cindex @code{bzero}, implicit usage
4058 @cindex @code{memset}, implicit usage
4059 @item TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4060 Define this macro if GCC should generate calls to the System V
4061 (and ANSI C) library functions @code{memcpy} and @code{memset}
4062 rather than the BSD functions @code{bcopy} and @code{bzero}.
4063
4064 @findex LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4065 @item LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4066 Define this macro if only @code{float} arguments cannot be passed to
4067 library routines (so they must be converted to @code{double}). This
4068 macro affects both how library calls are generated and how the library
4069 routines in @file{libgcc1.c} accept their arguments. It is useful on
4070 machines where floating and fixed point arguments are passed
4071 differently, such as the i860.
4072
4073 @findex FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4074 @item FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4075 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4076 pick up arguments of type @code{float}. (By default, they use a union
4077 of @code{float} and @code{int}.)
4078
4079 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4080 traditional C compilers that expect all arguments declared as @code{float}
4081 to arrive as @code{double}. To avoid this conversion, the library routines
4082 ask for the value as some other type and then treat it as a @code{float}.
4083
4084 On some systems, no other type will work for this. For these systems,
4085 you must use @code{LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE} instead, to force conversion of
4086 the values @code{double} before they are passed.
4087
4088 @findex FLOATIFY
4089 @item FLOATIFY (@var{passed-value})
4090 Define this macro to override the way library routines redesignate a
4091 @code{float} argument as a @code{float} instead of the type it was
4092 passed as. The default is an expression which takes the @code{float}
4093 field of the union.
4094
4095 @findex FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4096 @item FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4097 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4098 return values that ought to have type @code{float}. (By default, they
4099 use @code{int}.)
4100
4101 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4102 traditional C compilers gratuitously convert values declared as
4103 @code{float} into @code{double}.
4104
4105 @findex INTIFY
4106 @item INTIFY (@var{float-value})
4107 Define this macro to override the way the value of a
4108 @code{float}-returning library routine should be packaged in order to
4109 return it. These functions are actually declared to return type
4110 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} (normally @code{int}).
4111
4112 These values can't be returned as type @code{float} because traditional
4113 C compilers would gratuitously convert the value to a @code{double}.
4114
4115 A local variable named @code{intify} is always available when the macro
4116 @code{INTIFY} is used. It is a union of a @code{float} field named
4117 @code{f} and a field named @code{i} whose type is
4118 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} or @code{int}.
4119
4120 If you don't define this macro, the default definition works by copying
4121 the value through that union.
4122
4123 @findex nongcc_SI_type
4124 @item nongcc_SI_type
4125 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to
4126 @code{SImode} in the system's own C compiler.
4127
4128 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4129 is.
4130
4131 @findex nongcc_word_type
4132 @item nongcc_word_type
4133 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to the
4134 word_mode in the system's own C compiler.
4135
4136 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4137 is.
4138
4139 @findex perform_@dots{}
4140 @item perform_@dots{}
4141 Define these macros to supply explicit C statements to carry out various
4142 arithmetic operations on types @code{float} and @code{double} in the
4143 library routines in @file{libgcc1.c}. See that file for a full list
4144 of these macros and their arguments.
4145
4146 On most machines, you don't need to define any of these macros, because
4147 the C compiler that comes with the system takes care of doing them.
4148
4149 @findex NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4150 @item NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4151 Define this macro to generate code for Objective C message sending using
4152 the calling convention of the NeXT system. This calling convention
4153 involves passing the object, the selector and the method arguments all
4154 at once to the method-lookup library function.
4155
4156 The default calling convention passes just the object and the selector
4157 to the lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4158 @end table
4159
4160 @node Addressing Modes
4161 @section Addressing Modes
4162 @cindex addressing modes
4163
4164 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4165 This is about addressing modes.
4166
4167 @table @code
4168 @findex HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4169 @item HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4170 A C expression that is nonzero the machine supports post-increment addressing.
4171
4172 @findex HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4173 @findex HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4174 @findex HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4175 @item HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4176 @itemx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4177 @itemx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4178 Similar for other kinds of addressing.
4179
4180 @findex CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P
4181 @item CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4182 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4183 is a valid address. On most machines, this can be defined as
4184 @code{CONSTANT_P (@var{x})}, but a few machines are more restrictive
4185 in which constant addresses are supported.
4186
4187 @findex CONSTANT_P
4188 @code{CONSTANT_P} accepts integer-values expressions whose values are
4189 not explicitly known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and
4190 @code{high} expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in
4191 addition to @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4192
4193 @findex MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4194 @item MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4195 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4196 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4197 the maximum number that @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} would ever
4198 accept.
4199
4200 @findex GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS
4201 @item GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{label})
4202 A C compound statement with a conditional @code{goto @var{label};}
4203 executed if @var{x} (an RTX) is a legitimate memory address on the
4204 target machine for a memory operand of mode @var{mode}.
4205
4206 It usually pays to define several simpler macros to serve as
4207 subroutines for this one. Otherwise it may be too complicated to
4208 understand.
4209
4210 This macro must exist in two variants: a strict variant and a
4211 non-strict one. The strict variant is used in the reload pass. It
4212 must be defined so that any pseudo-register that has not been
4213 allocated a hard register is considered a memory reference. In
4214 contexts where some kind of register is required, a pseudo-register
4215 with no hard register must be rejected.
4216
4217 The non-strict variant is used in other passes. It must be defined to
4218 accept all pseudo-registers in every context where some kind of
4219 register is required.
4220
4221 @findex REG_OK_STRICT
4222 Compiler source files that want to use the strict variant of this
4223 macro define the macro @code{REG_OK_STRICT}. You should use an
4224 @code{#ifdef REG_OK_STRICT} conditional to define the strict variant
4225 in that case and the non-strict variant otherwise.
4226
4227 Subroutines to check for acceptable registers for various purposes (one
4228 for base registers, one for index registers, and so on) are typically
4229 among the subroutines used to define @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.
4230 Then only these subroutine macros need have two variants; the higher
4231 levels of macros may be the same whether strict or not.@refill
4232
4233 Normally, constant addresses which are the sum of a @code{symbol_ref}
4234 and an integer are stored inside a @code{const} RTX to mark them as
4235 constant. Therefore, there is no need to recognize such sums
4236 specifically as legitimate addresses. Normally you would simply
4237 recognize any @code{const} as legitimate.
4238
4239 Usually @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS} is not prepared to handle constant
4240 sums that are not marked with @code{const}. It assumes that a naked
4241 @code{plus} indicates indexing. If so, then you @emph{must} reject such
4242 naked constant sums as illegitimate addresses, so that none of them will
4243 be given to @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4244
4245 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} and address validation
4246 On some machines, whether a symbolic address is legitimate depends on
4247 the section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the
4248 macro @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
4249 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. When you see a
4250 @code{const}, you will have to look inside it to find the
4251 @code{symbol_ref} in order to determine the section. @xref{Assembler
4252 Format}.
4253
4254 @findex saveable_obstack
4255 The best way to modify the name string is by adding text to the
4256 beginning, with suitable punctuation to prevent any ambiguity. Allocate
4257 the new name in @code{saveable_obstack}. You will have to modify
4258 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to remove and decode the added text and
4259 output the name accordingly, and define @code{STRIP_NAME_ENCODING} to
4260 access the original name string.
4261
4262 You can check the information stored here into the @code{symbol_ref} in
4263 the definitions of the macros @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and
4264 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4265
4266 @findex REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4267 @item REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x})
4268 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4269 RTX) is valid for use as a base register. For hard registers, it
4270 should always accept those which the hardware permits and reject the
4271 others. Whether the macro accepts or rejects pseudo registers must be
4272 controlled by @code{REG_OK_STRICT} as described above. This usually
4273 requires two variant definitions, of which @code{REG_OK_STRICT}
4274 controls the one actually used.
4275
4276 @findex REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4277 @item REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x}, @var{mode})
4278 A C expression that is just like @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
4279 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
4280 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
4281 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
4282 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
4283 @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
4284
4285 @findex REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
4286 @item REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{x})
4287 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4288 RTX) is valid for use as an index register.
4289
4290 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
4291 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
4292 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
4293 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
4294 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
4295 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
4296 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
4297 only if neither labeling works.
4298
4299 @findex LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4300 @item LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{oldx}, @var{mode}, @var{win})
4301 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x} with a valid
4302 memory address for an operand of mode @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a
4303 C statement label elsewhere in the code; the macro definition may use
4304
4305 @example
4306 GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{win});
4307 @end example
4308
4309 @noindent
4310 to avoid further processing if the address has become legitimate.
4311
4312 @findex break_out_memory_refs
4313 @var{x} will always be the result of a call to @code{break_out_memory_refs},
4314 and @var{oldx} will be the operand that was given to that function to produce
4315 @var{x}.
4316
4317 The code generated by this macro should not alter the substructure of
4318 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4319 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4320
4321 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4322 address. The compiler has standard ways of doing so in all cases. In
4323 fact, it is safe for this macro to do nothing. But often a
4324 machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4325
4326 @findex LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS
4327 @item LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4328 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4329 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4330 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4331 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4332 performance reasons.
4333
4334 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4335 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4336 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4337 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4338 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4339 LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4340 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4341 be shared.
4342
4343 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4344 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4345 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4346 of reload internals.
4347
4348 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4349 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4350 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4351
4352 @findex push_reload
4353 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4354 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4355 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4356
4357 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4358 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4359 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4360 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4361 @code{push_reload}.
4362
4363 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4364 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4365 the address has become legitimate.
4366
4367 @findex copy_rtx
4368 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4369 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that is unshares only a
4370 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4371 top level, you'll need to replace first the top leve
4372 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4373 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4374
4375 @findex GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS
4376 @item GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS (@var{addr}, @var{label})
4377 A C statement or compound statement with a conditional @code{goto
4378 @var{label};} executed if memory address @var{x} (an RTX) can have
4379 different meanings depending on the machine mode of the memory
4380 reference it is used for or if the address is valid for some modes
4381 but not others.
4382
4383 Autoincrement and autodecrement addresses typically have mode-dependent
4384 effects because the amount of the increment or decrement is the size
4385 of the operand being addressed. Some machines have other mode-dependent
4386 addresses. Many RISC machines have no mode-dependent addresses.
4387
4388 You may assume that @var{addr} is a valid address for the machine.
4389
4390 @findex LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4391 @item LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4392 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate constant for
4393 an immediate operand on the target machine. You can assume that
4394 @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not check this. In fact,
4395 @samp{1} is a suitable definition for this macro on machines where
4396 anything @code{CONSTANT_P} is valid.@refill
4397 @end table
4398
4399 @node Condition Code
4400 @section Condition Code Status
4401 @cindex condition code status
4402
4403 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4404 This describes the condition code status.
4405
4406 @findex cc_status
4407 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4408 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4409 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4410 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4411 currently based, and several standard flags.
4412
4413 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4414 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4415 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4416
4417 @table @code
4418 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP
4419 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP
4420 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4421 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4422
4423 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4424
4425 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4426 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4427 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4428 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4429 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4430 define this macro to initialize it.
4431
4432 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4433
4434 @findex NOTICE_UPDATE_CC
4435 @item NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4436 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4437 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4438 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4439 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4440 set @code{(cc0)}.
4441
4442 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4443
4444 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4445 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4446 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4447 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4448 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4449 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4450 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4451 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4452 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4453 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4454 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4455 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4456 condition code value.
4457
4458 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4459 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4460 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4461 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4462 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4463 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4464 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4465
4466 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4467 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4468 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4469 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4470
4471 @findex EXTRA_CC_MODES
4472 @item EXTRA_CC_MODES
4473 A list of additional modes for condition code values in registers
4474 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}). This macro should expand to a sequence of
4475 calls of the macro @code{CC} separated by white space. @code{CC} takes
4476 two arguments. The first is the enumeration name of the mode, which
4477 should begin with @samp{CC} and end with @samp{mode}. The second is a C
4478 string giving the printable name of the mode; it should be the same as
4479 the first argument, but with the trailing @samp{mode} removed.
4480
4481 You should only define this macro if additional modes are required.
4482
4483 A sample definition of @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is:
4484 @smallexample
4485 #define EXTRA_CC_MODES \
4486 CC(CC_NOOVmode, "CC_NOOV") \
4487 CC(CCFPmode, "CCFP") \
4488 CC(CCFPEmode, "CCFPE")
4489 @end smallexample
4490
4491 @findex SELECT_CC_MODE
4492 @item SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4493 Returns a mode from class @code{MODE_CC} to be used when comparison
4494 operation code @var{op} is applied to rtx @var{x} and @var{y}. For
4495 example, on the Sparc, @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} is defined as (see
4496 @pxref{Jump Patterns} for a description of the reason for this
4497 definition)
4498
4499 @smallexample
4500 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4501 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4502 ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode) \
4503 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4504 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
4505 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4506 @end smallexample
4507
4508 You need not define this macro if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
4509
4510 @findex CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4511 @item CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON (@var{code}, @var{op0}, @var{op1})
4512 One some machines not all possible comparisons are defined, but you can
4513 convert an invalid comparison into a valid one. For example, the Alpha
4514 does not have a @code{GT} comparison, but you can use an @code{LT}
4515 comparison instead and swap the order of the operands.
4516
4517 On such machines, define this macro to be a C statement to do any
4518 required conversions. @var{code} is the initial comparison code
4519 and @var{op0} and @var{op1} are the left and right operands of the
4520 comparison, respectively. You should modify @var{code}, @var{op0}, and
4521 @var{op1} as required.
4522
4523 GCC will not assume that the comparison resulting from this macro is
4524 valid but will see if the resulting insn matches a pattern in the
4525 @file{md} file.
4526
4527 You need not define this macro if it would never change the comparison
4528 code or operands.
4529
4530 @findex REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE
4531 @item REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4532 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4533 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4534 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4535 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4536
4537 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4538 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4539 For example, here is the definition used on the Sparc, where floating-point
4540 inequality comparisons are always given @code{CCFPEmode}:
4541
4542 @smallexample
4543 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) ((MODE) != CCFPEmode)
4544 @end smallexample
4545
4546 @end table
4547
4548 @node Costs
4549 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4550 @cindex costs of instructions
4551 @cindex relative costs
4552 @cindex speed of instructions
4553
4554 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4555 on the target machine.
4556
4557 @table @code
4558 @findex CONST_COSTS
4559 @item CONST_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4560 A part of a C @code{switch} statement that describes the relative costs
4561 of constant RTL expressions. It must contain @code{case} labels for
4562 expression codes @code{const_int}, @code{const}, @code{symbol_ref},
4563 @code{label_ref} and @code{const_double}. Each case must ultimately
4564 reach a @code{return} statement to return the relative cost of the use
4565 of that kind of constant value in an expression. The cost may depend on
4566 the precise value of the constant, which is available for examination in
4567 @var{x}, and the rtx code of the expression in which it is contained,
4568 found in @var{outer_code}.
4569
4570 @var{code} is the expression code---redundant, since it can be
4571 obtained with @code{GET_CODE (@var{x})}.
4572
4573 @findex RTX_COSTS
4574 @findex COSTS_N_INSNS
4575 @item RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4576 Like @code{CONST_COSTS} but applies to nonconstant RTL expressions.
4577 This can be used, for example, to indicate how costly a multiply
4578 instruction is. In writing this macro, you can use the construct
4579 @code{COSTS_N_INSNS (@var{n})} to specify a cost equal to @var{n} fast
4580 instructions. @var{outer_code} is the code of the expression in which
4581 @var{x} is contained.
4582
4583 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4584 are adequate for the target machine.
4585
4586 @findex DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS
4587 @item DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4588 This macro, if defined, is called for any case not handled by the
4589 @code{RTX_COSTS} or @code{CONST_COSTS} macros. This eliminates the need
4590 to put case labels into the macro, but the code, or any functions it
4591 calls, must assume that the RTL in @var{x} could be of any type that has
4592 not already been handled. The arguments are the same as for
4593 @code{RTX_COSTS}, and the macro should execute a return statement giving
4594 the cost of any RTL expressions that it can handle. The default cost
4595 calculation is used for any RTL for which this macro does not return a
4596 value.
4597
4598 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4599 are adequate for the target machine.
4600
4601 @findex ADDRESS_COST
4602 @item ADDRESS_COST (@var{address})
4603 An expression giving the cost of an addressing mode that contains
4604 @var{address}. If not defined, the cost is computed from
4605 the @var{address} expression and the @code{CONST_COSTS} values.
4606
4607 For most CISC machines, the default cost is a good approximation of the
4608 true cost of the addressing mode. However, on RISC machines, all
4609 instructions normally have the same length and execution time. Hence
4610 all addresses will have equal costs.
4611
4612 In cases where more than one form of an address is known, the form with
4613 the lowest cost will be used. If multiple forms have the same, lowest,
4614 cost, the one that is the most complex will be used.
4615
4616 For example, suppose an address that is equal to the sum of a register
4617 and a constant is used twice in the same basic block. When this macro
4618 is not defined, the address will be computed in a register and memory
4619 references will be indirect through that register. On machines where
4620 the cost of the addressing mode containing the sum is no higher than
4621 that of a simple indirect reference, this will produce an additional
4622 instruction and possibly require an additional register. Proper
4623 specification of this macro eliminates this overhead for such machines.
4624
4625 Similar use of this macro is made in strength reduction of loops.
4626
4627 @var{address} need not be valid as an address. In such a case, the cost
4628 is not relevant and can be any value; invalid addresses need not be
4629 assigned a different cost.
4630
4631 On machines where an address involving more than one register is as
4632 cheap as an address computation involving only one register, defining
4633 @code{ADDRESS_COST} to reflect this can cause two registers to be live
4634 over a region of code where only one would have been if
4635 @code{ADDRESS_COST} were not defined in that manner. This effect should
4636 be considered in the definition of this macro. Equivalent costs should
4637 probably only be given to addresses with different numbers of registers
4638 on machines with lots of registers.
4639
4640 This macro will normally either not be defined or be defined as a
4641 constant.
4642
4643 @findex REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4644 @item REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{from}, @var{to})
4645 A C expression for the cost of moving data from a register in class
4646 @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are expressed using
4647 the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A value of 2 is the
4648 default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4649
4650 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4651 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4652 registers if they are not general registers.
4653
4654 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4655 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4656 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4657 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4658 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4659 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4660
4661 @findex MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4662 @item MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4663 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4664 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4665 is to be written to memory, non-zero if it is to be read in. This cost
4666 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4667 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4668 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4669
4670 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4671 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4672 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4673 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4674 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4675 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4676
4677 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4678 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4679 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4680 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4681 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4682 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4683 are the same as to this macro.
4684
4685 @findex BRANCH_COST
4686 @item BRANCH_COST
4687 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4688 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4689 @end table
4690
4691 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4692 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4693 ordinarily expect.
4694
4695 @table @code
4696 @findex SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4697 @item SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4698 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4699 than a word of memory (i.e. a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4700 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4701 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4702 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4703
4704 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4705 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4706 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4707 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4708 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4709 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4710
4711 @findex SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4712 @item SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4713 Define this macro if zero-extension (of a @code{char} or @code{short}
4714 to an @code{int}) can be done faster if the destination is a register
4715 that is known to be zero.
4716
4717 If you define this macro, you must have instruction patterns that
4718 recognize RTL structures like this:
4719
4720 @smallexample
4721 (set (strict_low_part (subreg:QI (reg:SI @dots{}) 0)) @dots{})
4722 @end smallexample
4723
4724 @noindent
4725 and likewise for @code{HImode}.
4726
4727 @findex SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4728 @item SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
4729 Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
4730 @var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
4731 than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
4732 handler.
4733
4734 When this macro is non-zero, the compiler will act as if
4735 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were non-zero when generating code for block
4736 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4737 Therefore, do not set this macro non-zero if unaligned accesses only add a
4738 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4739
4740 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined. If
4741 this macro is defined, it should produce a non-zero value when
4742 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is non-zero.
4743
4744 @findex DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4745 @item DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4746 Define this macro to inhibit strength reduction of memory addresses.
4747 (On some machines, such strength reduction seems to do harm rather
4748 than good.)
4749
4750 @findex MOVE_RATIO
4751 @item MOVE_RATIO
4752 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4753 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4754 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4755 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4756
4757 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4758 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4759 the number of such sequences.
4760
4761 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4762
4763 @findex MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
4764 @item MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
4765 A C expression used to determine whether @code{move_by_pieces} will be used to
4766 copy a chunk of memory, or whether some other block move mechanism
4767 will be used. Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
4768 than @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4769
4770 @findex MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4771 @item MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4772 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4773 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4774
4775 @findex USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT
4776 @item USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4777 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4778 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4779 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4780
4781 @findex USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT
4782 @item USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4783 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4784 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4785 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4786
4787 @findex USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT
4788 @item USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4789 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4790 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4791 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4792
4793 @findex USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT
4794 @item USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4795 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4796 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4797 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4798
4799 @findex USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT
4800 @item USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4801 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4802 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4803 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4804
4805 @findex USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT
4806 @item USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4807 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdeccrement is a good
4808 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4809 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4810
4811 @findex USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT
4812 @item USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4813 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4814 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4815 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4816
4817 @findex USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT
4818 @item USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4819 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4820 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4821 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4822
4823 @findex NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4824 @item NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4825 Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
4826 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4827
4828 @findex NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4829 @item NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4830 Define this macro if it is as good or better for a function to call
4831 itself with an explicit address than to call an address kept in a
4832 register.
4833
4834 @findex ADJUST_COST
4835 @item ADJUST_COST (@var{insn}, @var{link}, @var{dep_insn}, @var{cost})
4836 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer variable @var{cost}
4837 based on the relationship between @var{insn} that is dependent on
4838 @var{dep_insn} through the dependence @var{link}. The default is to
4839 make no adjustment to @var{cost}. This can be used for example to
4840 specify to the scheduler that an output- or anti-dependence does not
4841 incur the same cost as a data-dependence.
4842
4843 @findex ADJUST_PRIORITY
4844 @item ADJUST_PRIORITY (@var{insn})
4845 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer scheduling
4846 priority @code{INSN_PRIORITY(@var{insn})}. Reduce the priority
4847 to execute the @var{insn} earlier, increase the priority to execute
4848 @var{insn} later. Do not define this macro if you do not need to
4849 adjust the scheduling priorities of insns.
4850 @end table
4851
4852 @node Sections
4853 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4854 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4855 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4856
4857 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4858 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4859 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4860 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4861 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4862 of sections.
4863
4864 The compiler must tell the assembler when to switch sections. These
4865 macros control what commands to output to tell the assembler this. You
4866 can also define additional sections.
4867
4868 @table @code
4869 @findex TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4870 @item TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4871 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4872 operation that should precede instructions and read-only data. Normally
4873 @code{".text"} is right.
4874
4875 @findex DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4876 @item DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4877 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4878 operation to identify the following data as writable initialized data.
4879 Normally @code{".data"} is right.
4880
4881 @findex SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4882 @item SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4883 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4884 assembler operation to identify the following data as shared data. If
4885 not defined, @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP} will be used.
4886
4887 @findex BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4888 @item BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4889 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4890 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4891 data. If not defined, and neither @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} nor
4892 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are defined, uninitialized global data will be
4893 output in the data section if @samp{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise
4894 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be used.
4895
4896 @findex SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4897 @item SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4898 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4899 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4900 shared data. If not defined, and @code{BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP} is, the latter
4901 will be used.
4902
4903 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4904 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4905 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4906 assembler operation to identify the following data as initialization
4907 code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does not
4908 exist.
4909
4910 @findex EXTRA_SECTIONS
4911 @findex in_text
4912 @findex in_data
4913 @item EXTRA_SECTIONS
4914 A list of names for sections other than the standard two, which are
4915 @code{in_text} and @code{in_data}. You need not define this macro
4916 on a system with no other sections (that GCC needs to use).
4917
4918 @findex EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4919 @findex text_section
4920 @findex data_section
4921 @item EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4922 One or more functions to be defined in @file{varasm.c}. These
4923 functions should do jobs analogous to those of @code{text_section} and
4924 @code{data_section}, for your additional sections. Do not define this
4925 macro if you do not define @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}.
4926
4927 @findex READONLY_DATA_SECTION
4928 @item READONLY_DATA_SECTION
4929 On most machines, read-only variables, constants, and jump tables are
4930 placed in the text section. If this is not the case on your machine,
4931 this macro should be defined to be the name of a function (either
4932 @code{data_section} or a function defined in @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}) that
4933 switches to the section to be used for read-only items.
4934
4935 If these items should be placed in the text section, this macro should
4936 not be defined.
4937
4938 @findex SELECT_SECTION
4939 @item SELECT_SECTION (@var{exp}, @var{reloc})
4940 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
4941 output of @var{exp}. You can assume that @var{exp} is either a
4942 @code{VAR_DECL} node or a constant of some sort. @var{reloc}
4943 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
4944 relocations. Select the section by calling @code{text_section} or one
4945 of the alternatives for other sections.
4946
4947 Do not define this macro if you put all read-only variables and
4948 constants in the read-only data section (usually the text section).
4949
4950 @findex SELECT_RTX_SECTION
4951 @item SELECT_RTX_SECTION (@var{mode}, @var{rtx})
4952 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
4953 output of @var{rtx} in mode @var{mode}. You can assume that @var{rtx}
4954 is some kind of constant in RTL. The argument @var{mode} is redundant
4955 except in the case of a @code{const_int} rtx. Select the section by
4956 calling @code{text_section} or one of the alternatives for other
4957 sections.
4958
4959 Do not define this macro if you put all constants in the read-only
4960 data section.
4961
4962 @findex JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4963 @item JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4964 Define this macro to be an expression with a non-zero value if jump
4965 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4966 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4967 readonly data section is used.
4968
4969 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4970
4971 @findex ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
4972 @item ENCODE_SECTION_INFO (@var{decl})
4973 Define this macro if references to a symbol must be treated differently
4974 depending on something about the variable or function named by the
4975 symbol (such as what section it is in).
4976
4977 The macro definition, if any, is executed immediately after the rtl for
4978 @var{decl} has been created and stored in @code{DECL_RTL (@var{decl})}.
4979 The value of the rtl will be a @code{mem} whose address is a
4980 @code{symbol_ref}.
4981
4982 @cindex @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}, in @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}
4983 The usual thing for this macro to do is to record a flag in the
4984 @code{symbol_ref} (such as @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}) or to store a
4985 modified name string in the @code{symbol_ref} (if one bit is not enough
4986 information).
4987
4988 @findex STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
4989 @item STRIP_NAME_ENCODING (@var{var}, @var{sym_name})
4990 Decode @var{sym_name} and store the real name part in @var{var}, sans
4991 the characters that encode section info. Define this macro if
4992 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} alters the symbol's name string.
4993
4994 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION_P
4995 @item UNIQUE_SECTION_P (@var{decl})
4996 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{decl} should be placed
4997 into a unique section for some target-specific reason. If you do not
4998 define this macro, the default is @samp{0}. Note that the flag
4999 @samp{-ffunction-sections} will also cause functions to be placed into
5000 unique sections.
5001
5002 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION
5003 @item UNIQUE_SECTION (@var{decl}, @var{reloc})
5004 A C statement to build up a unique section name, expressed as a
5005 STRING_CST node, and assign it to @samp{DECL_SECTION_NAME (@var{decl})}.
5006 @var{reloc} indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires
5007 link-time relocations. If you do not define this macro, GCC will use
5008 the symbol name prefixed by @samp{.} as the section name. Note - this
5009 macro can now be called for unitialised data items as well as
5010 initialised data and functions.
5011 @end table
5012
5013 @node PIC
5014 @section Position Independent Code
5015 @cindex position independent code
5016 @cindex PIC
5017
5018 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5019 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5020 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the macros
5021 @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as
5022 well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You must modify the definition of
5023 @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate when the source operand
5024 contains a symbolic address. You may also need to alter the handling of
5025 switch statements so that they use relative addresses.
5026 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5027 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5028
5029 @table @code
5030 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5031 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5032 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5033 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5034 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI). When this macro
5035 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5036 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5037 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5038 necessary).
5039
5040 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5041 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5042 Define this macro if the register defined by
5043 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. Do not define
5044 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5045
5046 @findex FINALIZE_PIC
5047 @item FINALIZE_PIC
5048 By generating position-independent code, when two different programs (A
5049 and B) share a common library (libC.a), the text of the library can be
5050 shared whether or not the library is linked at the same address for both
5051 programs. In some of these environments, position-independent code
5052 requires not only the use of different addressing modes, but also
5053 special code to enable the use of these addressing modes.
5054
5055 The @code{FINALIZE_PIC} macro serves as a hook to emit these special
5056 codes once the function is being compiled into assembly code, but not
5057 before. (It is not done before, because in the case of compiling an
5058 inline function, it would lead to multiple PIC prologues being
5059 included in functions which used inline functions and were compiled to
5060 assembly language.)
5061
5062 @findex LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
5063 @item LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5064 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5065 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5066 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5067 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5068 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5069 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5070 position independent code.
5071 @end table
5072
5073 @node Assembler Format
5074 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5075
5076 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5077 to write instructions in assembler language--rather than what the
5078 instructions do.
5079
5080 @menu
5081 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5082 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5083 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5084 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5085 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5086 and termination routines.
5087 * Macros for Initialization::
5088 Specific macros that control the handling of
5089 initialization and termination routines.
5090 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5091 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5092 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5093 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5094 @end menu
5095
5096 @node File Framework
5097 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5098 @cindex assembler format
5099 @cindex output of assembler code
5100
5101 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5102 This describes the overall framework of an assembler file.
5103
5104 @table @code
5105 @findex ASM_FILE_START
5106 @item ASM_FILE_START (@var{stream})
5107 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5108 some appropriate text to go at the start of an assembler file.
5109
5110 Normally this macro is defined to output a line containing
5111 @samp{#NO_APP}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5112 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it can save time by not
5113 checking for certain assembler constructs.
5114
5115 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5116 see @file{attasm.h}.
5117
5118 @findex ASM_FILE_END
5119 @item ASM_FILE_END (@var{stream})
5120 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5121 some appropriate text to go at the end of an assembler file.
5122
5123 If this macro is not defined, the default is to output nothing
5124 special at the end of the file. Most systems don't require any
5125 definition.
5126
5127 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5128 see @file{attasm.h}.
5129
5130 @findex ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC
5131 @item ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC (@var{file})
5132 A C statement to output assembler commands which will identify
5133 the object file as having been compiled with GCC (or another
5134 GNU compiler).
5135
5136 If you don't define this macro, the string @samp{gcc_compiled.:}
5137 is output. This string is calculated to define a symbol which,
5138 on BSD systems, will never be defined for any other reason.
5139 GDB checks for the presence of this symbol when reading the
5140 symbol table of an executable.
5141
5142 On non-BSD systems, you must arrange communication with GDB in
5143 some other fashion. If GDB is not used on your system, you can
5144 define this macro with an empty body.
5145
5146 @findex ASM_COMMENT_START
5147 @item ASM_COMMENT_START
5148 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5149 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5150 the end of the line.
5151
5152 @findex ASM_APP_ON
5153 @item ASM_APP_ON
5154 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5155 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5156 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5157 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5158 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5159
5160 @findex ASM_APP_OFF
5161 @item ASM_APP_OFF
5162 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5163 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5164 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5165 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5166
5167 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5168 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5169 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5170 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5171 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5172
5173 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5174 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5175
5176 @findex OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING
5177 @item OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5178 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5179 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5180 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5181 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5182 of the filename using this macro.
5183
5184 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE
5185 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
5186 A C statement to output DBX or SDB debugging information before code
5187 for line number @var{line} of the current source file to the
5188 stdio stream @var{stream}.
5189
5190 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of debugging
5191 information for the debugger in use is appropriate.
5192
5193 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5194 @item ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5195 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to handle a
5196 @samp{#ident} directive containing the text @var{string}. If this
5197 macro is not defined, nothing is output for a @samp{#ident} directive.
5198
5199 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME
5200 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{reloc})
5201 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to switch to section
5202 @var{name} for object @var{decl} which is either a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, a
5203 @code{VAR_DECL} or @code{NULL_TREE}. @var{reloc}
5204 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
5205 relocations. Some target formats do not support
5206 arbitrary sections. Do not define this macro in such cases.
5207
5208 At present this macro is only used to support section attributes.
5209 When this macro is undefined, section attributes are disabled.
5210
5211 @findex OBJC_PROLOGUE
5212 @item OBJC_PROLOGUE
5213 A C statement to output any assembler statements which are required to
5214 precede any Objective C object definitions or message sending. The
5215 statement is executed only when compiling an Objective C program.
5216 @end table
5217
5218 @need 2000
5219 @node Data Output
5220 @subsection Output of Data
5221
5222 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5223 This describes data output.
5224
5225 @table @code
5226 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE
5227 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE
5228 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT
5229 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5230 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5231 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5232 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_THREE_QUARTER_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5233 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5234 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5235 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5236 instruction to assemble a floating-point constant of @code{TFmode},
5237 @code{DFmode}, @code{SFmode}, @code{TQFmode}, @code{HFmode}, or
5238 @code{QFmode}, respectively, whose value is @var{value}. @var{value}
5239 will be a C expression of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. Macros such as
5240 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE} are useful for writing these
5241 definitions.
5242
5243 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT
5244 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT
5245 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INT
5246 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT
5247 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR
5248 @findex output_addr_const
5249 @item ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5250 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5251 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5252 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5253 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5254 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5255 instruction to assemble an integer of 16, 8, 4, 2 or 1 bytes,
5256 respectively, whose value is @var{value}. The argument @var{exp} will
5257 be an RTL expression which represents a constant value. Use
5258 @samp{output_addr_const (@var{stream}, @var{exp})} to output this value
5259 as an assembler expression.@refill
5260
5261 For sizes larger than @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, if the action of a macro
5262 would be identical to repeatedly calling the macro corresponding to
5263 a size of @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, once for each word, you need not define
5264 the macro.
5265
5266 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE
5267 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5268 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5269 instruction to assemble a single byte containing the number @var{value}.
5270
5271 @findex ASM_BYTE_OP
5272 @item ASM_BYTE_OP
5273 A C string constant giving the pseudo-op to use for a sequence of
5274 single-byte constants. If this macro is not defined, the default is
5275 @code{"byte"}.
5276
5277 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII
5278 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5279 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5280 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5281 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5282 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5283
5284 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5285 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5286 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5287
5288 @findex CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5289 @item CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5290 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5291 expression to have a non-zero value if GCC should output the constant
5292 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5293 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5294 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5295 pool before the function.
5296
5297 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE
5298 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5299 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5300 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5301 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5302 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5303 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5304 immediately after this call.
5305
5306 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5307 not be defined.
5308
5309 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY
5310 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5311 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5312 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5313 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5314
5315 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5316 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5317 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5318 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5319 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5320 alignment.
5321
5322 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5323 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5324 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5325 Here is how to do this:
5326
5327 @example
5328 ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5329 @end example
5330
5331 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5332 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5333 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5334
5335 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5336
5337 @findex CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P
5338 @item CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P (@var{exp})
5339 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if the constant
5340 @var{exp}, of type @code{tree}, should be output after the code for a
5341 function. The compiler will normally output all constants before the
5342 function; you need not define this macro if this is OK.
5343
5344 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE
5345 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5346 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5347 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5348 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5349 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5350 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5351
5352 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5353 define this macro.
5354
5355 @findex IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR
5356 @item IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C})
5357 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5358 used as a logical line separator by the assembler.
5359
5360 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5361 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5362
5363
5364 @findex ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5365 @findex ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5366 @item ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5367 @itemx ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5368 These macros are defined as C string constant, describing the syntax
5369 in the assembler for grouping arithmetic expressions. The following
5370 definitions are correct for most assemblers:
5371
5372 @example
5373 #define ASM_OPEN_PAREN "("
5374 #define ASM_CLOSE_PAREN ")"
5375 @end example
5376 @end table
5377
5378 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5379 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5380
5381 @table @code
5382 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5383 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5384 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5385 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE
5386 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE
5387 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE
5388 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the target's
5389 floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in the array of
5390 @code{long int} whose address is @var{l}. The number of elements in the
5391 output array is determined by the size of the desired target floating
5392 point data type: 32 bits of it go in each @code{long int} array
5393 element. Each array element holds 32 bits of the result, even if
5394 @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits on the host machine.
5395
5396 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5397 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5398 machine's memory.
5399
5400 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL (@var{x}, @var{format}, @var{string})
5401 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL
5402 This macro converts @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to a
5403 decimal number and stores it as a string into @var{string}.
5404 You must pass, as @var{string}, the address of a long enough block
5405 of space to hold the result.
5406
5407 The argument @var{format} is a @code{printf}-specification that serves
5408 as a suggestion for how to format the output string.
5409 @end table
5410
5411 @node Uninitialized Data
5412 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5413
5414 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5415 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5416
5417 @table @code
5418 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON
5419 @item ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5420 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5421 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5422 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5423 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5424
5425 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5426 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5427 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5428
5429 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5430 common global variables are output.
5431
5432 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON
5433 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5434 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5435 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5436 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5437 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5438 as the number of bits.
5439
5440 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON
5441 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5442 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5443 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5444 is not corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC wil use it
5445 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5446 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5447 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5448
5449 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON
5450 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5451 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, except that it
5452 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5453 will be used.
5454
5455 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BSS
5456 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5457 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5458 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5459 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5460 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5461
5462 Try to use function @code{asm_output_bss} defined in @file{varasm.c} when
5463 defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5464 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5465 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5466 the name, and a newline.
5467
5468 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized global
5469 variables are output. This macro exists to properly support languages like
5470 @code{c++} which do not have @code{common} data. However, this macro currently
5471 is not defined for all targets. If this macro and
5472 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are not defined then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5473 or @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} or
5474 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON} is used.
5475
5476 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS
5477 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5478 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} except takes the required alignment as a
5479 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5480 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, and gives you more flexibility in
5481 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5482 as the number of bits.
5483
5484 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5485 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro.
5486
5487 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS
5488 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5489 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, except that it
5490 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}
5491 will be used.
5492
5493 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL
5494 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5495 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5496 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5497 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5498 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5499
5500 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5501 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5502 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5503
5504 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5505 static variables are output.
5506
5507 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL
5508 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5509 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5510 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5511 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5512 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5513 as the number of bits.
5514
5515 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL
5516 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5517 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5518 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5519 is not corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC wil use it
5520 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5521 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5522 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5523
5524 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL
5525 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5526 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, except that it
5527 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}
5528 will be used.
5529 @end table
5530
5531 @node Label Output
5532 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5533
5534 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5535 This is about outputting labels.
5536
5537 @table @code
5538 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL
5539 @findex assemble_name
5540 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5541 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5542 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5543 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5544 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5545 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5546
5547 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME
5548 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5549 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5550 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5551 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5552 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5553 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5554 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5555
5556 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5557 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5558
5559 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE
5560 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5561 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5562 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5563 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5564 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5565 representing the function.
5566
5567 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5568
5569 @findex ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME
5570 @item ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5571 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5572 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5573 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5574 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5575 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5576
5577 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5578 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5579
5580 @findex ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL
5581 @item ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5582 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5583 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5584 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5585
5586 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5587 nothing.
5588
5589 @findex ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT
5590 @item ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5591 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5592 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5593 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5594 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5595 something about the size of the object.
5596
5597 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5598 nothing.
5599
5600 @findex ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5601 @item ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5602 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5603 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} global;
5604 that is, available for reference from other files. Use the expression
5605 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5606 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5607 for making that name global, and a newline.
5608
5609 @findex ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5610 @item ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5611 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5612 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5613 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5614 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5615 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5616 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5617 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5618
5619 If you don't define this macro, GCC will not support weak
5620 symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} macro.
5621
5622 @findex SUPPORTS_WEAK
5623 @item SUPPORTS_WEAK
5624 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5625
5626 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5627 definition. If @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} is defined, the default
5628 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5629 you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler flag such as
5630 @samp{-melf}.
5631
5632 @findex MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5633 @item MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY
5634 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5635 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5636 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5637 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5638 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5639 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5640
5641 @findex SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5642 @item SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5643 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5644 semantics.
5645
5646 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5647 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5648 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5649 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5650 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5651 be emitted as one-only.
5652
5653 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL
5654 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5655 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5656 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5657 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5658 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5659 declaration.
5660
5661 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5662 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5663
5664 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5665 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL (@var{stream}, @var{symref})
5666 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output on @var{stream} an assembler
5667 pseudo-op to declare a library function name external. The name of the
5668 library function is given by @var{symref}, which has type @code{rtx} and
5669 is a @code{symbol_ref}.
5670
5671 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5672 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5673
5674 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF
5675 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5676 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5677 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5678 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5679 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5680 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5681
5682 @ignore @c Seems not to exist anymore.
5683 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT
5684 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT (@var{file}, @var{label})
5685 Define this macro for systems that use the program @code{collect2}.
5686 The definition should be a C statement to output a word containing
5687 a reference to the label @var{label}.
5688 @end ignore
5689
5690 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL
5691 @item ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5692 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a label whose
5693 name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5694
5695 It is absolutely essential that these labels be distinct from the labels
5696 used for user-level functions and variables. Otherwise, certain programs
5697 will have name conflicts with internal labels.
5698
5699 It is desirable to exclude internal labels from the symbol table of the
5700 object file. Most assemblers have a naming convention for labels that
5701 should be excluded; on many systems, the letter @samp{L} at the
5702 beginning of a label has this effect. You should find out what
5703 convention your system uses, and follow it.
5704
5705 The usual definition of this macro is as follows:
5706
5707 @example
5708 fprintf (@var{stream}, "L%s%d:\n", @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5709 @end example
5710
5711 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALTERNATE_LABEL_NAME
5712 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALTERNATE_LABEL_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5713 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} the string
5714 @var{string}.
5715
5716 The default definition of this macro is as follows:
5717
5718 @example
5719 fprintf (@var{stream}, "%s:\n", LABEL_ALTERNATE_NAME (INSN))
5720 @end example
5721
5722 @findex ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL
5723 @item ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5724 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5725 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5726
5727 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5728 produce the output that @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL} would produce
5729 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5730
5731 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5732 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5733 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5734 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5735 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5736 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5737 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5738
5739 @findex ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME
5740 @item ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5741 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5742 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5743 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5744 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5745
5746 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5747 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5748 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5749 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5750 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5751 internal static variables in different scopes.
5752
5753 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5754 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5755 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5756 between the name and the number will suffice.
5757
5758 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF
5759 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5760 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5761 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5762
5763 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5764 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5765 correct for most systems.
5766
5767 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS
5768 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5769 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5770 which defines (equates) the symbol whoes tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5771 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5772 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5773 the tree nodes are available.
5774
5775 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL
5776 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL (@var{stream}, @var{symbol}, @var{high}, @var{low})
5777 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5778 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{symbol} to have a value equal to
5779 the difference of the two symbols @var{high} and @var{low}, i.e.
5780 @var{high} minus @var{low}. GCC guarantees that the symbols @var{high}
5781 and @var{low} are already known by the assembler so that the difference
5782 resolves into a constant.
5783
5784 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5785 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5786 correct for most systems.
5787
5788 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS
5789 @item ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5790 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5791 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5792 @var{value}.
5793
5794 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5795 ASM_OUTPUT_DEF instead if possible.
5796
5797 @findex OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL
5798 @item OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5799 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5800 Objective C methods.
5801
5802 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5803 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5804 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5805 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5806
5807 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5808 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5809 systems define other ways of computing names.
5810
5811 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5812 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5813 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5814 50 characters extra.
5815
5816 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5817 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5818 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or NULL if the method is not
5819 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5820
5821 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5822 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5823 @end table
5824
5825 @node Initialization
5826 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5827 @cindex initialization routines
5828 @cindex termination routines
5829 @cindex constructors, output of
5830 @cindex destructors, output of
5831
5832 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5833 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5834 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5835 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5836 @code{main} is called.
5837
5838 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5839 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5840 terminates.
5841
5842 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5843 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5844 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5845 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5846
5847 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5848 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5849 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5850
5851 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5852 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5853 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5854 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5855 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5856
5857 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5858 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5859 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5860 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5861 pointer containing zero.
5862
5863 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5864 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5865 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5866 list; destructors in forward order.
5867
5868 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5869 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5870 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5871 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5872 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5873 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5874 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5875 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5876
5877 To use this method, you need appropriate definitions of the macros
5878 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}. Usually
5879 you can get them by including @file{svr4.h}.
5880
5881 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5882 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5883 support an @dfn{init} section which is executed at program startup,
5884 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5885 program is linked by the @code{gcc} driver like this:
5886
5887 @example
5888 ld -o @var{output_file} crtbegin.o @dots{} crtend.o -lgcc
5889 @end example
5890
5891 The head of a function (@code{__do_global_ctors}) appears in the init
5892 section of @file{crtbegin.o}; the remainder of the function appears in
5893 the init section of @file{crtend.o}. The linker will pull these two
5894 parts of the section together, making a whole function. If any of the
5895 user's object files linked into the middle of it contribute code, then that
5896 code will be executed as part of the body of @code{__do_global_ctors}.
5897
5898 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5899 macro properly.
5900
5901 If no init section is available, do not define
5902 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. Then @code{__do_global_ctors} is built into
5903 the text section like all other functions, and resides in
5904 @file{libgcc.a}. When GCC compiles any function called @code{main}, it
5905 inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5906 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function, also defined
5907 in @file{libgcc2.c}, simply calls @file{__do_global_ctors}.
5908
5909 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5910 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5911 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5912 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5913 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5914 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5915 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5916 the value to a ``set''; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5917 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5918 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5919 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5920 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5921 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5922 the initialization process.
5923
5924 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5925 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5926 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'. In
5927 this case, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} does not produce an
5928 @code{N_SETT} symbol; initialization and termination functions are
5929 recognized simply by their names. This requires an extra program in the
5930 linkage step, called @code{collect2}. This program pretends to be the
5931 linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running the ordinary
5932 linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of initialization and
5933 termination functions. These functions are called via @code{__main} as
5934 described above.
5935
5936 Choosing among these configuration options has been simplified by a set
5937 of operating-system-dependent files in the @file{config} subdirectory.
5938 These files define all of the relevant parameters. Usually it is
5939 sufficient to include one into your specific machine-dependent
5940 configuration file. These files are:
5941
5942 @table @file
5943 @item aoutos.h
5944 For operating systems using the `a.out' format.
5945
5946 @item next.h
5947 For operating systems using the `MachO' format.
5948
5949 @item svr3.h
5950 For System V Release 3 and similar systems using `COFF' format.
5951
5952 @item svr4.h
5953 For System V Release 4 and similar systems using `ELF' format.
5954
5955 @item vms.h
5956 For the VMS operating system.
5957 @end table
5958
5959 @ifinfo
5960 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
5961 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
5962 @end ifinfo
5963
5964 @node Macros for Initialization
5965 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
5966
5967 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
5968 and termination functions:
5969
5970 @table @code
5971 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5972 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5973 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to identify
5974 the following data as initialization code. If not defined, GCC will
5975 assume such a section does not exist. When you are using special
5976 sections for initialization and termination functions, this macro also
5977 controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to run the
5978 initialization functions.
5979
5980 @item HAS_INIT_SECTION
5981 @findex HAS_INIT_SECTION
5982 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
5983 This macro should be defined for systems that control the contents of the
5984 init section on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
5985 be defined explicitly for systems that support
5986 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5987
5988 @item LD_INIT_SWITCH
5989 @findex LD_INIT_SWITCH
5990 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5991 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
5992
5993 @item LD_FINI_SWITCH
5994 @findex LD_FINI_SWITCH
5995 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
5996 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
5997
5998 @item INVOKE__main
5999 @findex INVOKE__main
6000 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6001 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6002 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6003 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6004
6005 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6006 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR
6007 Define this macro as a C statement to output on the stream @var{stream}
6008 the assembler code to arrange to call the function named @var{name} at
6009 initialization time.
6010
6011 Assume that @var{name} is the name of a C function generated
6012 automatically by the compiler. This function takes no arguments. Use
6013 the function @code{assemble_name} to output the name @var{name}; this
6014 performs any system-specific syntactic transformations such as adding an
6015 underscore.
6016
6017 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output to arrange to
6018 call the function. This is correct when the function will be called in
6019 some other manner---for example, by means of the @code{collect2} program,
6020 which looks through the symbol table to find these functions by their
6021 names.
6022
6023 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6024 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR
6025 This is like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} but used for termination
6026 functions rather than initialization functions.
6027
6028 When @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} are
6029 defined, the initializaiton routine generated for the generated object
6030 file will have static linkage.
6031 @end table
6032
6033 If your system uses @code{collect2} as the means of processing
6034 constructors, then that program normally uses @code{nm} to scan an
6035 object file for constructor functions to be called. On such systems you
6036 must not define @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}
6037 as the object file's initialization routine must have global scope.
6038
6039 On certain kinds of systems, you can define these macros to make
6040 @code{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6041
6042 @table @code
6043 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6044 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6045 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6046 object files, so that @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6047 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6048
6049 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
6050 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
6051 Define this macro if the system uses ROSE format object files, so that
6052 @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan object files directly
6053 for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6054
6055 These macros are effective only in a native compiler; @code{collect2} as
6056 part of a cross compiler always uses @code{nm} for the target machine.
6057
6058 @findex REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6059 @item REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6060 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6061 to execute @code{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6062 @code{nm}.
6063
6064 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6065 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6066 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6067 termination functions in shared libraries:
6068
6069 @findex LDD_SUFFIX
6070 @item LDD_SUFFIX
6071 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the
6072 program which lists dynamic dependencies, like @code{"ldd"} under SunOS 4.
6073
6074 @findex PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT
6075 @item PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{PTR})
6076 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6077 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{PTR} is a variable
6078 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6079 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6080 code must advance @var{PTR} to the beginning of the filename on that
6081 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{PTR} to @code{NULL}.
6082
6083 @end table
6084
6085 @node Instruction Output
6086 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6087
6088 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6089 This describes assembler instruction output.
6090
6091 @table @code
6092 @findex REGISTER_NAMES
6093 @item REGISTER_NAMES
6094 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6095 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6096 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6097
6098 @findex ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6099 @item ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6100 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6101 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6102 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6103 to registers using alternate names.
6104
6105 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE
6106 @item ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6107 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6108 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6109
6110 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6111 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6112 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6113 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6114 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6115 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6116 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6117 so that it will not be output twice.
6118
6119 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6120 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6121 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6122 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6123 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6124
6125 @findex recog_operand
6126 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6127 elements of @code{recog_operand}.
6128
6129 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6130 in the usual way.
6131
6132 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN
6133 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6134 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6135 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6136 they will be output differently.
6137
6138 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6139 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6140 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6141 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6142 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6143 by changing the contents of the vector.
6144
6145 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6146 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6147 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6148 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6149 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6150 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6151
6152 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6153
6154 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6155 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6156 If defined, @code{FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN} will be called on each
6157 @code{CODE_LABEL}. In that case, @var{opvec} will be a null pointer and
6158 @var{noperands} will be zero.
6159
6160 @findex PRINT_OPERAND
6161 @item PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6162 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6163 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6164 RTL expression.
6165
6166 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6167 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6168 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6169 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6170 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6171 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6172 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6173
6174 @findex reg_names
6175 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6176 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6177 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6178 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6179
6180 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6181 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6182 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6183 @var{code}.
6184
6185 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P
6186 @item PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6187 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6188 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6189 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6190 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6191 in this way.
6192
6193 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS
6194 @item PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6195 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6196 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6197 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6198
6199 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6200 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6201 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the macro
6202 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6203 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler Format}.
6204
6205 @findex DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND
6206 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6207 @item DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND(@var{file})
6208 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6209 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6210 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6211 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6212 or whatever.
6213
6214 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6215 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6216 explicit (e.g. with white space).
6217
6218 @findex final_sequence
6219 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6220 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence (i.e.
6221 when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6222 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6223 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6224 being output.
6225
6226 @findex REGISTER_PREFIX
6227 @findex LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6228 @findex USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6229 @findex IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6230 @findex asm_fprintf
6231 @item REGISTER_PREFIX
6232 @itemx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6233 @itemx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6234 @itemx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6235 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6236 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6237 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6238 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6239 files can define these macros differently.
6240
6241 @item ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS(@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6242 @findex ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS
6243 If defiend this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6244 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6245 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6246 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6247 statements. Noet that upper case letters are reserved for future
6248 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6249 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6250 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6251 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6252 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6253
6254 @findex ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6255 @item ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6256 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6257 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6258 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6259 first variant.
6260
6261 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6262 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}} in the output
6263 templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the first argument
6264 of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs @samp{option0},
6265 @samp{option1} or @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6266 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one or two, etc. Any special
6267 characters within these strings retain their usual meaning.
6268
6269 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6270 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6271 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6272
6273 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6274 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6275 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6276 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6277 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6278 opcodes or operand order.
6279
6280 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH
6281 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6282 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6283 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6284 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6285 profiling.
6286
6287 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP
6288 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6289 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6290 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6291 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6292 profiling.
6293 @end table
6294
6295 @node Dispatch Tables
6296 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6297
6298 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6299 This concerns dispatch tables.
6300
6301 @table @code
6302 @cindex dispatch table
6303 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
6304 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6305 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6306 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6307 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6308 definitions of these labels are output using
6309 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}, and they must be printed in the same
6310 way here. For example,
6311
6312 @example
6313 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6314 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6315 @end example
6316
6317 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6318 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GNU
6319 CC will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC.
6320 @var{body} is the body of the ADDR_DIFF_VEC; it is provided so that the
6321 mode and flags can be read.
6322
6323 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
6324 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6325 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6326 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6327
6328 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6329 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6330 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6331 definition is output using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6332 For example,
6333
6334 @example
6335 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6336 @end example
6337
6338 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
6339 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6340 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6341 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6342 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}; the fourth argument is the
6343 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_insn} containing an
6344 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6345
6346 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6347 for the table.
6348
6349 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6350 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6351
6352 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END
6353 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6354 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6355 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6356 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6357 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6358 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6359 of the preceding label.
6360
6361 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6362 the jump-table.
6363 @end table
6364
6365 @node Exception Region Output
6366 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6367
6368 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6369
6370 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6371 region.
6372
6373 @table @code
6374 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG
6375 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG ()
6376 A C expression to output text to mark the start of an exception region.
6377
6378 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6379
6380 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END
6381 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END ()
6382 A C expression to output text to mark the end of an exception region.
6383
6384 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6385
6386 @findex EXCEPTION_SECTION
6387 @item EXCEPTION_SECTION ()
6388 A C expression to switch to the section in which the main
6389 exception table is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is a
6390 section named @code{.gcc_except_table} on machines that support named
6391 sections via @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME}, otherwise if @samp{-fpic}
6392 or @samp{-fPIC} is in effect, the @code{data_section}, otherwise the
6393 @code{readonly_data_section}.
6394
6395 @findex EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6396 @item EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6397 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to switch to
6398 the section for exception handling frame unwind information. If not
6399 defined, GCC will provide a default definition if the target supports
6400 named sections. @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the
6401 appropriate section.
6402
6403 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6404 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6405
6406 @findex OMIT_EH_TABLE
6407 @item OMIT_EH_TABLE ()
6408 A C expression that is nonzero if the normal exception table output
6409 should be omitted.
6410
6411 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6412
6413 @findex EH_TABLE_LOOKUP
6414 @item EH_TABLE_LOOKUP ()
6415 Alternate runtime support for looking up an exception at runtime and
6416 finding the associated handler, if the default method won't work.
6417
6418 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6419
6420 @findex DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6421 @item DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6422 A C expression that decides whether or not the current function needs to
6423 have a function unwinder generated for it. See the file @code{except.c}
6424 for details on when to define this, and how.
6425
6426 @findex MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6427 @item MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6428 An rtx used to mask the return address found via RETURN_ADDR_RTX, so
6429 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6430
6431 @findex DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6432 @item DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6433 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6434 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6435 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6436 @samp{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either @samp{UNALIGNED_INT_ASM_OP}
6437 or @samp{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}), GCC will provide a default definition of
6438 1.
6439
6440 If this macro is defined to 1, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be the default
6441 exception handling mechanism; otherwise, setjmp/longjmp will be used by
6442 default.
6443
6444 If this macro is defined to anything, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be used
6445 instead of inline unwinders and __unwind_function in the non-setjmp case.
6446
6447 @end table
6448
6449 @node Alignment Output
6450 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6451
6452 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6453 This describes commands for alignment.
6454
6455 @table @code
6456 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER
6457 @item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6458 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6459 a BARRIER.
6460
6461 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6462 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6463 define the macro.
6464
6465 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6466 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6467 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6468 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER}
6469 implementation.
6470
6471 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6472 @item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6473 The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying
6474 @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER}. This works only if
6475 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6476
6477 @findex LOOP_ALIGN
6478 @item LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6479 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6480 a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG note.
6481
6482 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6483 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6484 define the macro.
6485
6486 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6487 to set the variable @var{align_loops} in the target's
6488 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6489 selection in @var{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6490
6491 @findex LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6492 @item LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6493 The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying @code{LOOP_ALIGN}.
6494 This works only if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6495
6496 @findex LABEL_ALIGN
6497 @item LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6498 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6499 If LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER / LOOP_ALIGN specify a different alignment,
6500 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6501
6502 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6503 to set the variable @var{align_labels} in the target's
6504 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS}. Otherwise, you should try to honour the user's
6505 selection in @var{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6506
6507 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6508 @item LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6509 The maximum number of bytes to skip when applying @code{LABEL_ALIGN}.
6510 This works only if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN} is defined.
6511
6512 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP
6513 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6514 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6515 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6516 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6517 expression of type @code{int}.
6518
6519 @findex ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6520 @item ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6521 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6522 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6523 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6524 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6525 section.
6526
6527 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN
6528 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6529 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6530 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6531 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6532
6533 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN
6534 @item ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6535 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6536 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6537 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6538 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6539 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6540 @end table
6541
6542 @need 3000
6543 @node Debugging Info
6544 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6545
6546 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6547 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6548
6549 @menu
6550 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6551 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6552 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6553 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6554 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6555 @end menu
6556
6557 @node All Debuggers
6558 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6559
6560 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6561 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6562
6563 @table @code
6564 @findex DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER
6565 @item DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6566 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6567 register number @var{regno}. In simple cases, the value of this
6568 expression may be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are some
6569 registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6570 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in
6571 the compiler and another for DBX.
6572
6573 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6574 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6575 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6576 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6577 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6578
6579 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6580 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6581 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6582
6583 @findex DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET
6584 @item DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6585 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6586 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6587 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6588 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6589 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6590 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6591 @samp{-g} options is used.
6592
6593 @findex DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET
6594 @item DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6595 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6596 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6597 @var{offset}.
6598
6599 @findex PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6600 @item PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6601 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6602 produce when the user specifies just @samp{-g}. Define
6603 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6604 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6605 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, and
6606 @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}.
6607
6608 When the user specifies @samp{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6609 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6610 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined and
6611 @code{LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2} is not defined, GCC uses the
6612 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6613 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6614
6615 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6616 user can always get a specific type of output by using @samp{-gstabs},
6617 @samp{-gcoff}, @samp{-gdwarf-1}, @samp{-gdwarf-2}, or @samp{-gxcoff}.
6618 @end table
6619
6620 @node DBX Options
6621 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6622
6623 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6624 These are specific options for DBX output.
6625
6626 @table @code
6627 @findex DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6628 @item DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6629 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6630 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6631
6632 @findex XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6633 @item XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6634 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6635 in response to the @samp{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6636
6637 @findex DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6638 @item DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6639 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6640 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6641 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6642 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6643 if there is any occasion to.
6644
6645 @findex DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6646 @item DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6647 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6648 in the text section.
6649
6650 @findex ASM_STABS_OP
6651 @item ASM_STABS_OP
6652 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6653 @code{.stabs} to define an ordinary debugging symbol. If you don't
6654 define this macro, @code{.stabs} is used. This macro applies only to
6655 DBX debugging information format.
6656
6657 @findex ASM_STABD_OP
6658 @item ASM_STABD_OP
6659 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6660 @code{.stabd} to define a debugging symbol whose value is the current
6661 location. If you don't define this macro, @code{.stabd} is used.
6662 This macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6663
6664 @findex ASM_STABN_OP
6665 @item ASM_STABN_OP
6666 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6667 @code{.stabn} to define a debugging symbol with no name. If you don't
6668 define this macro, @code{.stabn} is used. This macro applies only to
6669 DBX debugging information format.
6670
6671 @findex DBX_NO_XREFS
6672 @item DBX_NO_XREFS
6673 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6674 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6675 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6676 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6677
6678 @findex DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6679 @item DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6680 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6681 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6682 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6683 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6684 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6685 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6686 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6687
6688 @findex DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6689 @item DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6690 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6691 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6692 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6693 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6694 if backslash is correct for your system.
6695
6696 @findex DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6697 @item DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6698 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6699 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6700 variable.
6701
6702 @findex DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6703 @item DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6704 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6705 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6706
6707 @findex DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6708 @item DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6709 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6710 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6711 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6712
6713 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6714 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6715 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6716 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6717 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6718
6719 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6720 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6721 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6722 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6723 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6724
6725 @findex DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6726 @item DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6727 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a stack
6728 parameter. The default is @code{'p'}.
6729
6730 @findex DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6731 @item DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6732 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6733 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6734 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6735 code.
6736
6737 @findex DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6738 @item DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6739 Define this macro if the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol for a block should
6740 precede the debugging information for variables and functions defined in
6741 that block. Normally, in DBX format, the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol comes
6742 first.
6743
6744 @findex DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6745 @item DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6746 Define this macro if the value of a symbol describing the scope of a
6747 block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be relative to the start
6748 of the enclosing function. Normally, GNU C uses an absolute address.
6749
6750 @findex DBX_USE_BINCL
6751 @item DBX_USE_BINCL
6752 Define this macro if GNU C should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6753 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6754 macro also directs GNU C to output a type number as a pair of a file
6755 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GNU C does not
6756 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6757 number for a type number.
6758 @end table
6759
6760 @node DBX Hooks
6761 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6762
6763 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6764 These are hooks for DBX format.
6765
6766 @table @code
6767 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC
6768 @item DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6769 Define this macro to say how to output to @var{stream} the debugging
6770 information for the start of a scope level for variable names. The
6771 argument @var{name} is the name of an assembler symbol (for use with
6772 @code{assemble_name}) whose value is the address where the scope begins.
6773
6774 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC
6775 @item DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6776 Like @code{DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC}, but for the end of a scope level.
6777
6778 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM
6779 @item DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM (@var{stream}, @var{type})
6780 Define this macro if the target machine requires special handling to
6781 output an enumeration type. The definition should be a C statement
6782 (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information to @var{stream}
6783 for the type @var{type}.
6784
6785 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END
6786 @item DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END (@var{stream}, @var{function})
6787 Define this macro if the target machine requires special output at the
6788 end of the debugging information for a function. The definition should
6789 be a C statement (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information
6790 to @var{stream}. @var{function} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node for
6791 the function.
6792
6793 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES
6794 @item DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES (@var{syms})
6795 Define this macro if you need to control the order of output of the
6796 standard data types at the beginning of compilation. The argument
6797 @var{syms} is a @code{tree} which is a chain of all the predefined
6798 global symbols, including names of data types.
6799
6800 Normally, DBX output starts with definitions of the types for integers
6801 and characters, followed by all the other predefined types of the
6802 particular language in no particular order.
6803
6804 On some machines, it is necessary to output different particular types
6805 first. To do this, define @code{DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES} to output
6806 those symbols in the necessary order. Any predefined types that you
6807 don't explicitly output will be output afterward in no particular order.
6808
6809 Be careful not to define this macro so that it works only for C. There
6810 are no global variables to access most of the built-in types, because
6811 another language may have another set of types. The way to output a
6812 particular type is to look through @var{syms} to see if you can find it.
6813 Here is an example:
6814
6815 @smallexample
6816 @{
6817 tree decl;
6818 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6819 if (!strcmp (IDENTIFIER_POINTER (DECL_NAME (decl)),
6820 "long int"))
6821 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6822 @dots{}
6823 @}
6824 @end smallexample
6825
6826 @noindent
6827 This does nothing if the expected type does not exist.
6828
6829 See the function @code{init_decl_processing} in @file{c-decl.c} to find
6830 the names to use for all the built-in C types.
6831
6832 Here is another way of finding a particular type:
6833
6834 @c this is still overfull. --mew 10feb93
6835 @smallexample
6836 @{
6837 tree decl;
6838 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6839 if (TREE_CODE (decl) == TYPE_DECL
6840 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (decl))
6841 == INTEGER_CST)
6842 && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (decl)) == 16
6843 && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (decl)))
6844 @group
6845 /* @r{This must be @code{unsigned short}.} */
6846 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6847 @dots{}
6848 @}
6849 @end group
6850 @end smallexample
6851
6852 @findex NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6853 @item NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6854 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6855 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extention construct.
6856 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6857 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6858
6859 @end table
6860
6861 @node File Names and DBX
6862 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6863
6864 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6865 This describes file names in DBX format.
6866
6867 @table @code
6868 @findex DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6869 @item DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6870 Define this if DBX wants to have the current directory recorded in each
6871 object file.
6872
6873 Note that the working directory is always recorded if GDB extensions are
6874 enabled.
6875
6876 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME
6877 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6878 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6879 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6880 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6881 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6882
6883 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6884 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6885
6886 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6887 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6888 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6889 @var{stream} which indicates that the current directory during
6890 compilation is named @var{name}.
6891
6892 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6893 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6894
6895 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6896 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6897 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6898 compilation of the main source file @var{name}.
6899
6900 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6901 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6902
6903 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
6904 @item DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6905 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6906 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the current source
6907 file. This output is generated each time input shifts to a different
6908 source file as a result of @samp{#include}, the end of an included file,
6909 or a @samp{#line} command.
6910
6911 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6912 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6913 @end table
6914
6915 @need 2000
6916 @node SDB and DWARF
6917 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
6918
6919 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6920 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
6921
6922 @table @code
6923 @findex SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6924 @item SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6925 Define this macro if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
6926 for SDB in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6927
6928 @findex DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6929 @item DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6930 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf format debugging output
6931 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6932
6933 @findex DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6934 @item DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6935 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6936 debugging output in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6937
6938 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6939 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6940 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6941 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6942 as appropriate from @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6943
6944 @findex DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6945 @item DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6946 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
6947 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}
6948 (@pxref{Exception Region Output} is nonzero, GCC will output this
6949 information not matter how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6950
6951 @findex LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
6952 @item LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
6953 Define this macro if the linker does not work with Dwarf version 2.
6954 Normally, if the user specifies only @samp{-ggdb} GCC will use Dwarf
6955 version 2 if available; this macro disables this. See the description
6956 of the @code{PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE} macro for more details.
6957
6958 @findex DWARF2_GENERATE_TEXT_SECTION_LABEL
6959 @item DWARF2_GENERATE_TEXT_SECTION_LABEL
6960 By default, the Dwarf 2 debugging information generator will generate a
6961 label to mark the beginning of the text section. If it is better simply
6962 to use the name of the text section itself, rather than an explicit label,
6963 to indicate the beginning of the text section, define this macro to zero.
6964
6965 @findex DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6966 @item DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6967 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
6968 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
6969 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
6970
6971 @findex PUT_SDB_@dots{}
6972 @item PUT_SDB_@dots{}
6973 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
6974 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
6975 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
6976 not define them yourself.
6977
6978 @findex SDB_DELIM
6979 @item SDB_DELIM
6980 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
6981 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
6982 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
6983 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
6984 required.
6985
6986 @findex SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
6987 @item SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
6988 Define this macro to override the usual method of constructing a dummy
6989 name for anonymous structure and union types. See @file{sdbout.c} for
6990 more information.
6991
6992 @findex SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
6993 @item SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
6994 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
6995 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
6996 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
6997 it.
6998
6999 @findex SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7000 @item SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7001 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
7002 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
7003 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
7004 @end table
7005
7006 @node Cross-compilation
7007 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7008 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7009 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7010
7011 While all modern machines use 2's complement representation for integers,
7012 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7013 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7014 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7015 doing the compilation.
7016
7017 @findex atof
7018 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7019 range and precision, the cross compiler cannot safely use the host
7020 machine's floating point arithmetic. Therefore, floating point constants
7021 must be represented in the target machine's format. This means that the
7022 cross compiler cannot use @code{atof} to parse a floating point constant;
7023 it must have its own special routine to use instead. Also, constant
7024 folding must emulate the target machine's arithmetic (or must not be done
7025 at all).
7026
7027 The macros in the following table should be defined only if you are cross
7028 compiling between different floating point formats.
7029
7030 Otherwise, don't define them. Then default definitions will be set up which
7031 use @code{double} as the data type, @code{==} to test for equality, etc.
7032
7033 You don't need to worry about how many times you use an operand of any
7034 of these macros. The compiler never uses operands which have side effects.
7035
7036 @table @code
7037 @findex REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7038 @item REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7039 A macro for the C data type to be used to hold a floating point value
7040 in the target machine's format. Typically this would be a
7041 @code{struct} containing an array of @code{int}.
7042
7043 @findex REAL_VALUES_EQUAL
7044 @item REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (@var{x}, @var{y})
7045 A macro for a C expression which compares for equality the two values,
7046 @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7047
7048 @findex REAL_VALUES_LESS
7049 @item REAL_VALUES_LESS (@var{x}, @var{y})
7050 A macro for a C expression which tests whether @var{x} is less than
7051 @var{y}, both values being of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and
7052 interpreted as floating point numbers in the target machine's
7053 representation.
7054
7055 @findex REAL_VALUE_LDEXP
7056 @findex ldexp
7057 @item REAL_VALUE_LDEXP (@var{x}, @var{scale})
7058 A macro for a C expression which performs the standard library
7059 function @code{ldexp}, but using the target machine's floating point
7060 representation. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression have
7061 type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. The second argument, @var{scale}, is an
7062 integer.
7063
7064 @findex REAL_VALUE_FIX
7065 @item REAL_VALUE_FIX (@var{x})
7066 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
7067 floating point value @var{x} to a signed integer. @var{x} has type
7068 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7069
7070 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX
7071 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (@var{x})
7072 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
7073 floating point value @var{x} to an unsigned integer. @var{x} has type
7074 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7075
7076 @findex REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT
7077 @item REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (@var{x})
7078 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
7079 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an integer value (but still
7080 as a floating point number). @var{x} has type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE},
7081 and so does the value.
7082
7083 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT
7084 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (@var{x})
7085 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
7086 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an unsigned integer value
7087 (but still represented as a floating point number). @var{x} has type
7088 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, and so does the value.
7089
7090 @findex REAL_VALUE_ATOF
7091 @item REAL_VALUE_ATOF (@var{string}, @var{mode})
7092 A macro for a C expression which converts @var{string}, an expression of
7093 type @code{char *}, into a floating point number in the target machine's
7094 representation for mode @var{mode}. The value has type
7095 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7096
7097 @findex REAL_INFINITY
7098 @item REAL_INFINITY
7099 Define this macro if infinity is a possible floating point value, and
7100 therefore division by 0 is legitimate.
7101
7102 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISINF
7103 @findex isinf
7104 @item REAL_VALUE_ISINF (@var{x})
7105 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
7106 point value, is infinity. The value has type @code{int}.
7107 By default, this is defined to call @code{isinf}.
7108
7109 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISNAN
7110 @findex isnan
7111 @item REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (@var{x})
7112 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
7113 point value, is a ``nan'' (not-a-number). The value has type
7114 @code{int}. By default, this is defined to call @code{isnan}.
7115 @end table
7116
7117 @cindex constant folding and floating point
7118 Define the following additional macros if you want to make floating
7119 point constant folding work while cross compiling. If you don't
7120 define them, cross compilation is still possible, but constant folding
7121 will not happen for floating point values.
7122
7123 @table @code
7124 @findex REAL_ARITHMETIC
7125 @item REAL_ARITHMETIC (@var{output}, @var{code}, @var{x}, @var{y})
7126 A macro for a C statement which calculates an arithmetic operation of
7127 the two floating point values @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type
7128 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} in the target machine's representation, to
7129 produce a result of the same type and representation which is stored
7130 in @var{output} (which will be a variable).
7131
7132 The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}, a tree code
7133 which will always be one of the following: @code{PLUS_EXPR},
7134 @code{MINUS_EXPR}, @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR},
7135 @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.@refill
7136
7137 @cindex overflow while constant folding
7138 The expansion of this macro is responsible for checking for overflow.
7139 If overflow happens, the macro expansion should execute the statement
7140 @code{return 0;}, which indicates the inability to perform the
7141 arithmetic operation requested.
7142
7143 @findex REAL_VALUE_NEGATE
7144 @item REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (@var{x})
7145 A macro for a C expression which returns the negative of the floating
7146 point value @var{x}. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression
7147 have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and are in the target machine's
7148 floating point representation.
7149
7150 There is no way for this macro to report overflow, since overflow
7151 can't happen in the negation operation.
7152
7153 @findex REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE
7154 @item REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (@var{mode}, @var{x})
7155 A macro for a C expression which converts the floating point value
7156 @var{x} to mode @var{mode}.
7157
7158 Both @var{x} and the value of the expression are in the target machine's
7159 floating point representation and have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7160 However, the value should have an appropriate bit pattern to be output
7161 properly as a floating constant whose precision accords with mode
7162 @var{mode}.
7163
7164 There is no way for this macro to report overflow.
7165
7166 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_INT
7167 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_INT (@var{low}, @var{high}, @var{x})
7168 A macro for a C expression which converts a floating point value
7169 @var{x} into a double-precision integer which is then stored into
7170 @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int}.
7171
7172 @item REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (@var{x}, @var{low}, @var{high}, @var{mode})
7173 @findex REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT
7174 A macro for a C expression which converts a double-precision integer
7175 found in @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int},
7176 into a floating point value which is then stored into @var{x}.
7177 The value is in the target machine's representation for mode @var{mode}
7178 and has the type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7179 @end table
7180
7181 @node Misc
7182 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7183 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7184
7185 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7186 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7187
7188 @table @code
7189 @item PREDICATE_CODES
7190 @findex PREDICATE_CODES
7191 Define this if you have defined special-purpose predicates in the file
7192 @file{@var{machine}.c}. This macro is called within an initializer of an
7193 array of structures. The first field in the structure is the name of a
7194 predicate and the second field is an array of rtl codes. For each
7195 predicate, list all rtl codes that can be in expressions matched by the
7196 predicate. The list should have a trailing comma. Here is an example
7197 of two entries in the list for a typical RISC machine:
7198
7199 @smallexample
7200 #define PREDICATE_CODES \
7201 @{"gen_reg_rtx_operand", @{SUBREG, REG@}@}, \
7202 @{"reg_or_short_cint_operand", @{SUBREG, REG, CONST_INT@}@},
7203 @end smallexample
7204
7205 Defining this macro does not affect the generated code (however,
7206 incorrect definitions that omit an rtl code that may be matched by the
7207 predicate can cause the compiler to malfunction). Instead, it allows
7208 the table built by @file{genrecog} to be more compact and efficient,
7209 thus speeding up the compiler. The most important predicates to include
7210 in the list specified by this macro are those used in the most insn
7211 patterns.
7212
7213 @item SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES
7214 @findex SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES
7215 Define this if you have special predicates that know special things
7216 about modes. Genrecog will warn about certain forms of
7217 @code{match_operand} without a mode; if the operand predicate is
7218 listed in @code{SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES}, the warning will be
7219 suppressed.
7220
7221 Here is an example from the IA-32 port (@code{ext_register_operand}
7222 specially checks for @code{HImode} or @code{SImode} in preparation
7223 for a byte extraction from @code{%ah} etc.).
7224
7225 @smallexample
7226 #define SPECIAL_MODE_PREDICATES \
7227 "ext_register_operand",
7228 @end smallexample
7229
7230 @findex CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7231 @item CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7232 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7233 elements of a jump-table should have.
7234
7235 @findex CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE
7236 @item CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7237 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7238 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7239 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7240 To make this work, you also have to define INSN_ALIGN and
7241 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7242 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7243 flags can be updated.
7244
7245 @findex CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7246 @item CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7247 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7248 should contain relative addresses. If jump-tables never contain
7249 relative addresses, then you need not define this macro.
7250
7251 @findex CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7252 @item CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7253 Define this if control falls through a @code{case} insn when the index
7254 value is out of range. This means the specified default-label is
7255 actually ignored by the @code{case} insn proper.
7256
7257 @findex CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7258 @item CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7259 Define this to be the smallest number of different values for which it
7260 is best to use a jump-table instead of a tree of conditional branches.
7261 The default is four for machines with a @code{casesi} instruction and
7262 five otherwise. This is best for most machines.
7263
7264 @findex WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7265 @item WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7266 Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
7267 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7268 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7269
7270 @findex LOAD_EXTEND_OP
7271 @item LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mode})
7272 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7273 memory in @var{mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7274 bits outside of @var{mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7275 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7276 of @var{mode} for which the
7277 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7278 @code{NIL} for other modes.
7279
7280 This macro is not called with @var{mode} non-integral or with a width
7281 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7282 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7283 @code{NIL}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7284 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7285
7286 @findex SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7287 @item SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7288 Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7289 extends.
7290
7291 @findex IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7292 @item IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7293 An alias for a tree code that should be used by default for conversion
7294 of floating point values to fixed point. Normally,
7295 @code{FIX_ROUND_EXPR} is used.@refill
7296
7297 @findex FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7298 @item FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7299 Define this macro if the same instructions that convert a floating
7300 point number to a signed fixed point number also convert validly to an
7301 unsigned one.
7302
7303 @findex EASY_DIV_EXPR
7304 @item EASY_DIV_EXPR
7305 An alias for a tree code that is the easiest kind of division to
7306 compile code for in the general case. It may be
7307 @code{TRUNC_DIV_EXPR}, @code{FLOOR_DIV_EXPR}, @code{CEIL_DIV_EXPR} or
7308 @code{ROUND_DIV_EXPR}. These four division operators differ in how
7309 they round the result to an integer. @code{EASY_DIV_EXPR} is used
7310 when it is permissible to use any of those kinds of division and the
7311 choice should be made on the basis of efficiency.@refill
7312
7313 @findex MOVE_MAX
7314 @item MOVE_MAX
7315 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7316 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7317
7318 @findex MAX_MOVE_MAX
7319 @item MAX_MOVE_MAX
7320 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7321 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7322 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7323 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7324 at run-time.
7325
7326 @findex SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7327 @item SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7328 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7329 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7330 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7331 this macro is non-zero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7332 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7333 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7334 instructions that act on bitfields at variable positions, which may
7335 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7336 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7337 arguments to bitfield instructions.
7338
7339 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7340 position (for bitfield operations), or if no variable-position bitfield
7341 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7342
7343 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7344 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7345 bitfield operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7346 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7347 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7348
7349 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7350
7351 @findex TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7352 @item TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7353 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7354 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7355 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7356 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7357
7358 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7359
7360 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7361 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7362 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7363 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7364 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7365 such cases may improve things.
7366
7367 @findex STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7368 @item STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7369 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7370 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7371 (@samp{s@var{cond}}) when the condition is true. This description must
7372 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns and all the
7373 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7374
7375 A value of 1 or -1 means that the instruction implementing the
7376 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or -1 when the comparison is true
7377 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7378 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7379 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7380 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7381 @samp{s@var{cond}} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7382 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7383 the compiler.
7384
7385 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or -1, the compiler will
7386 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7387 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7388 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7389 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7390 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7391 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7392 expression
7393
7394 @smallexample
7395 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7396 @end smallexample
7397
7398 @noindent
7399 can be converted to
7400
7401 @smallexample
7402 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7403 @end smallexample
7404
7405 @noindent
7406 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7407 tested into the sign bit.
7408
7409 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7410 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7411 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7412 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7413 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7414 comparison operators and let us know
7415 @ifset USING
7416 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs}).
7417 @end ifset
7418 @ifclear USING
7419 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs,gcc.info,Using GCC}).
7420 @end ifclear
7421
7422 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7423 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7424 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7425 to be used:
7426
7427 @itemize @bullet
7428 @item
7429 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7430 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7431 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7432 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7433 combine the normalization with other operations.
7434
7435 @item
7436 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or -1, with -1 being
7437 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7438 other machines.
7439
7440 @item
7441 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7442 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7443 others.
7444
7445 @item
7446 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7447 @end itemize
7448
7449 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7450 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7451 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7452 those cases, e.g., one matching
7453
7454 @smallexample
7455 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7456 @end smallexample
7457
7458 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7459 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7460 @samp{s@var{cond}} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7461 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7462 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7463 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7464 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptizer can be used to
7465 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7466
7467 You need not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7468 instructions.
7469
7470 @findex FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7471 @item FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7472 A C expression that gives a non-zero floating point value that is
7473 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7474 Define this macro on machine that have comparison operations that return
7475 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7476 this macro.
7477
7478 @findex Pmode
7479 @item Pmode
7480 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7481 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7482 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7483 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7484 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7485
7486 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7487 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7488 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7489 to @code{Pmode}.
7490
7491 @findex FUNCTION_MODE
7492 @item FUNCTION_MODE
7493 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7494 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most machines this
7495 should be @code{QImode}.
7496
7497 @findex INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD
7498 @item INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD (@var{decl})
7499 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions above which the
7500 function @var{decl} should not be inlined. @var{decl} is a
7501 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node.
7502
7503 The default definition of this macro is 64 plus 8 times the number of
7504 arguments that the function accepts. Some people think a larger
7505 threshold should be used on RISC machines.
7506
7507 @findex SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7508 @item SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7509 Define this if the preprocessor should ignore @code{#sccs} directives
7510 and print no error message.
7511
7512 @findex NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7513 @item NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7514 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C.
7515 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7516 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7517 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7518
7519 @findex HANDLE_PRAGMA
7520 @findex #pragma
7521 @findex pragma
7522 @item HANDLE_PRAGMA (@var{getc}, @var{ungetc}, @var{name})
7523 Define this macro if you want to implement any pragmas. If defined, it
7524 is a C expression whose value is 1 if the pragma was handled by the
7525 macro, zero otherwise. The argument @var{getc} is a function of type
7526 @samp{int (*)(void)} which will return the next character in the input
7527 stream, or EOF if no characters are left. The argument @var{ungetc} is
7528 a function of type @samp{void (*)(int)} which will push a character back
7529 into the input stream. The argument @var{name} is the word following
7530 #pragma in the input stream. The input stream pointer will be pointing
7531 just beyond the end of this word. The input stream should be left
7532 undistrubed if the expression returns zero, otherwise it should be
7533 pointing at the next character after the end of the pragma. Any
7534 characters remaining on the line will be ignored.
7535
7536 It is generally a bad idea to implement new uses of @code{#pragma}. The
7537 only reason to define this macro is for compatibility with other
7538 compilers that do support @code{#pragma} for the sake of any user
7539 programs which already use it.
7540
7541 If the pragma can be implemented by atttributes then the macro
7542 @samp{INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} might be a useful one to define as well.
7543
7544 Note: older versions of this macro only had two arguments: @var{stream}
7545 and @var{token}. The macro was changed in order to allow it to work
7546 when gcc is built both with and without a cpp library.
7547
7548 @findex HANDLE_SYSV_PRAGMA
7549 @findex #pragma
7550 @findex pragma
7551 @item HANDLE_SYSV_PRAGMA
7552 Define this macro (to a value of 1) if you want the System V style
7553 pragmas @samp{#pragma pack(<n>)} and @samp{#pragma weak <name>
7554 [=<value>]} to be supported by gcc.
7555
7556 The pack pragma specifies the maximum alignment (in bytes) of fields
7557 within a structure, in much the same way as the @samp{__aligned__} and
7558 @samp{__packed__} @code{__attribute__}s do. A pack value of zero resets
7559 the behaviour to the default.
7560
7561 The weak pragma only works if @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} and
7562 @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} are defined. If enabled it allows the creation
7563 of specifically named weak labels, optionally with a value.
7564
7565 @findex HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_PUSH_POP
7566 @findex #pragma
7567 @findex pragma
7568 @item HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_PUSH_POP
7569 Define this macro (to a value of 1) if you want to support the Win32
7570 style pragmas @samp{#pragma pack(push,<n>)} and @samp{#pragma
7571 pack(pop)}. The pack(push,<n>) pragma specifies the maximum alignment
7572 (in bytes) of fields within a structure, in much the same way as the
7573 @samp{__aligned__} and @samp{__packed__} @code{__attribute__}s do. A
7574 pack value of zero resets the behaviour to the default. Successive
7575 invocations of this pragma cause the previous values to be stacked, so
7576 that invocations of @samp{#pragma pack(pop)} will return to the previous
7577 value.
7578
7579 @findex VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE
7580 @item VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE (@var{decl}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7581 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7582 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{decl}.
7583 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{decl}.
7584
7585 @findex VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE
7586 @item VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE (@var{type}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7587 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7588 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{type}.
7589 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{type}.
7590
7591 @findex COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7592 @item COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7593 If defined, a C expression whose value is zero if the attributes on
7594 @var{type1} and @var{type2} are incompatible, one if they are compatible,
7595 and two if they are nearly compatible (which causes a warning to be
7596 generated).
7597
7598 @findex SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7599 @item SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type})
7600 If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7601 newly defined @var{type}.
7602
7603 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7604 @item MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7605 Define this macro if the merging of type attributes needs special handling.
7606 If defined, the result is a list of the combined TYPE_ATTRIBUTES of
7607 @var{type1} and @var{type2}. It is assumed that comptypes has already been
7608 called and returned 1.
7609
7610 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7611 @item MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{olddecl}, @var{newdecl})
7612 Define this macro if the merging of decl attributes needs special handling.
7613 If defined, the result is a list of the combined DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of
7614 @var{olddecl} and @var{newdecl}. @var{newdecl} is a duplicate declaration
7615 of @var{olddecl}. Examples of when this is needed are when one attribute
7616 overrides another, or when an attribute is nullified by a subsequent
7617 definition.
7618
7619 @findex INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7620 @item INSERT_ATTRIBUTES (@var{node}, @var{attr_ptr}, @var{prefix_ptr})
7621 Define this macro if you want to be able to add attributes to a decl
7622 when it is being created. This is normally useful for backends which
7623 wish to implement a pragma by using the attributes which correspond to
7624 the pragma's effect. The @var{node} argument is the decl which is being
7625 created. The @var{attr_ptr} argument is a pointer to the attribute list
7626 for this decl. The @var{prefix_ptr} is a pointer to the list of
7627 attributes that have appeared after the specifiers and modifiers of the
7628 declaration, but before the declaration proper.
7629
7630 @findex SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7631 @item SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{decl}, @var{attributes})
7632 If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7633 newly defined @var{decl}.
7634
7635 @findex DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7636 @item DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7637 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in identifier
7638 names. 0 means @samp{$} is not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed.
7639 1 is the default; there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7640 This macro controls the compiler proper; it does not affect the preprocessor.
7641
7642 @findex NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7643 @item NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7644 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7645 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
7646 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
7647 @samp{.} is used instead.
7648
7649 @findex NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7650 @item NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7651 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7652 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
7653 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
7654 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
7655
7656 @findex DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7657 @item DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7658 Define this macro if the target system expects every program's @code{main}
7659 function to return a standard ``success'' value by default (if no other
7660 value is explicitly returned).
7661
7662 The definition should be a C statement (sans semicolon) to generate the
7663 appropriate rtl instructions. It is used only when compiling the end of
7664 @code{main}.
7665
7666 @item NEED_ATEXIT
7667 @findex NEED_ATEXIT
7668 Define this if the target system lacks the function @code{atexit}
7669 from the ANSI C standard. If this macro is defined, a default definition
7670 will be provided to support C++. If @code{ON_EXIT} is not defined,
7671 a default @code{exit} function will also be provided.
7672
7673 @item ON_EXIT
7674 @findex ON_EXIT
7675 Define this macro if the target has another way to implement atexit
7676 functionality without replacing @code{exit}. For instance, SunOS 4 has
7677 a similar @code{on_exit} library function.
7678
7679 The definition should be a functional macro which can be used just like
7680 the @code{atexit} function.
7681
7682 @item EXIT_BODY
7683 @findex EXIT_BODY
7684 Define this if your @code{exit} function needs to do something
7685 besides calling an external function @code{_cleanup} before
7686 terminating with @code{_exit}. The @code{EXIT_BODY} macro is
7687 only needed if neither @code{HAVE_ATEXIT} nor
7688 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} are defined.
7689
7690 @findex INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED
7691 @item INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7692 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7693 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7694 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7695 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7696 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7697 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7698 you should define this macro.
7699
7700 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7701
7702 @findex INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED
7703 @item INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7704 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7705 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7706 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7707 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7708 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7709 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7710 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7711 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7712 slot of @var{insn}.
7713
7714 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7715
7716 @findex MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7717 @item MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG (@var{insn})
7718 In rare cases, correct code generation requires extra machine
7719 dependent processing between the second jump optimization pass and
7720 delayed branch scheduling. On those machines, define this macro as a C
7721 statement to act on the code starting at @var{insn}.
7722
7723 @findex MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7724 @item MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7725 Define this macro if in some cases global symbols from one translation
7726 unit may not be bound to undefined symbols in another translation unit
7727 without user intervention. For instance, under Microsoft Windows
7728 symbols must be explicitly imported from shared libraries (DLLs).
7729
7730 @findex MD_ASM_CLOBBERS
7731 @item MD_ASM_CLOBBERS
7732 A C statement that adds to @var{CLOBBERS} @code{STRING_CST} trees for
7733 any hard regs the port wishes to automatically clobber for all asms.
7734
7735 @findex ISSUE_RATE
7736 @item ISSUE_RATE
7737 A C expression that returns how many instructions can be issued at the
7738 same time if the machine is a superscalar machine. This is only used by
7739 the @samp{Haifa} scheduler, and not the traditional scheduler.
7740
7741 @findex MD_SCHED_INIT
7742 @item MD_SCHED_INIT (@var{file}, @var{verbose})
7743 A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler at the
7744 beginning of each block of instructions that are to be scheduled.
7745 @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any
7746 debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by
7747 @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7748
7749 @findex MD_SCHED_REORDER
7750 @item MD_SCHED_REORDER (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{ready}, @var{n_ready},
7751 @var{clock}, @var{can_issue_more})
7752 A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler after it
7753 has scheduled the ready list to allow the machine description to reorder
7754 it (for example to combine two small instructions together on
7755 @samp{VLIW} machines). @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio
7756 stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level
7757 provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}. @var{ready} is a pointer to
7758 the ready list of instructions that are ready to be scheduled.
7759 @var{n_ready} is the number of elements in the ready list. The
7760 scheduler reads the ready list in reverse order, starting with
7761 @var{ready}[@var{n_ready}-1] and going to @var{ready}[0]. @var{clock}
7762 is the timer tick of the scheduler. @var{can_issue_more} is an output
7763 parameter that is set to the number of insns that can issue this clock;
7764 normally this is just @code{issue_rate}.
7765
7766 @findex MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
7767 @item MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{insn}, @var{more})
7768 A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler after it
7769 has scheduled an insn from the ready list. @var{file} is either a null
7770 pointer, or a stdio stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose}
7771 is the verbose level provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7772 @var{insn} is the instruction that was scheduled. @var{more} is the
7773 number of instructions that can be issued in the current cycle. The
7774 @samp{MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE} macro is responsible for updating the
7775 value of @var{more} (typically by @var{more}--).
7776
7777 @findex MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7778 @item MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7779 Define this to the largest integer machine mode which can be used for
7780 operations other than load, store and copy operations.
7781
7782 You need only define this macro if the target holds values larger than
7783 @code{word_mode} in general purpose registers. Most targets should not define
7784 this macro.
7785
7786 @findex MATH_LIBRARY
7787 @item MATH_LIBRARY
7788 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7789 in the system math library, or @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7790 separate math library.
7791
7792 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"-lm"} is wrong.
7793
7794 @findex LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7795 @item LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7796 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7797 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7798
7799 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7800 is wrong.
7801 @end table